IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-S) A 1.0 I.I Ui|2i 125 |jo ■^~ ■^H ■•'£ 1^ III 2.2 Hf 1^ 12.0 u 1.8 1.25 III 1.4 1 1.6 ^= 111^= i^ ^ _ ^/z ► V} ^ n % /j "V > .^.v^ ^m o^;^v '/ Photographic Sciences Corporation ^1%. -i.- ..^ «p 33 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/ICMH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques C^ Technical and Bibliographic Notas/Notss tachniquas at bibliographiquas The Institute has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any of the images in tha reproduction, or which may significantly change the usual method of filming, are checked below. D Coloured covers/ Couverture do coulaur □ Covers damaged/ Couverture endommag^ I I Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couverture restaur^ et/ou peiiicul^a Cover title missing/ Le titre de couverture manque Coloured maps/ Cartes giographiques en coulaur Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encra da coulaur (i.e. autre qua blaua ou noira) Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planchaa at/ ju illustrations 9n couieur Bound with other material/ Relit avac d'autres documents D D D Tight binding may causa shadows or distortion along interior margin/ Lareliure serrte puut causer da I'ombra ou de la distorsion le long de la marge intirieura Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajouties lors d'une restauration apparaissant dans la texte, mais, iorsque cela itait possible, ces pages n'ont pas iti filmtes. Additional comments:/ Commentaires supplimentaires; L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire qu'il lui a iti possible de se procurer. Les details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du point de vue bibliographique. qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la mtthoda normale de filmage sont indiqute ci-dessous. Th« tol Fyj Coloured pages/ Pages de couieur Pages damaged/ Pages endommagtes Pages restored and/oi Pages restaurtes et/ou pelliculdes Pages discoloured, stained or foxe< Pages d^colories, tachattes ou piquees Pages detached/ Pages ditachies Showthrough/ Transparence Quality of prin Qualiti inigale de I'impression Includes supplementary materia Comprend du material supplementaire Only edition available/ Seule Edition disponible r~~] Pages damaged/ j I Pages restored and/or laminated/ r~7| Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ I I Pages detached/ r~^ Showthrough/ I I Quality of print varies/ I I Includes supplementary material/ r*n Only edition available/ n Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc., have been ref limed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pages totalement ou partieilement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata. une pelure. etc.. cnt it6 filmies i nouveau de facon d obtenir la meilleure image possible. Thfl poa ofl filnr Ori| bag the sioi othi firs) sior or il The shal TIN whi Mai diff< enti beg righ reqi met This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est film* au taux de reduction indiqu* ci-dessous. 10X 14X 18X 22X y 12X 16X 20X 26X 30X 24X 28X 32X The copy filmed here hes been reproduced thenks to the generosity of: Douglas Library Queen's University The imeges appearing here ere the best quality possible considering the condition end legibility of the original copy and in keeping with the filming contract specifications. Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed beginning with the front cover and ending on the Jest page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All other original copies are filmed beginning on the first page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impression. The last recorded frame on each microfiche shall contain the symbol — ^> (meaning "CON- TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), whichever applies. IMIaps, platet:. charts, etc., may be filmed et different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one exposure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand sorner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as required. The following diagrams illustrate the method: L'exemplaire film* fut reprodult grice A la g*nirosit« de: Douglas Library Queen's University Les images suivantes ont «t« reproduites avec ie plus grajd soin, compte tenu de la condition et de ie nettet* de I'exempiaire fllm«, et en conformitA evec les conditions du contrat de fllmage. Les exempialres originaux dont la couverture en papier est ImprimAe sont filmte en commen^ant par Ie premier plat et en terminant soit par la dernlAre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par Ie second plat, salon Ie ces. Tous les autres exempiaires originaux sont filmAs en commenpant par la premiere page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par la derniire page qui comporte une teits empreinte. Un dee symboles suivants apparaftra sur la dernlAre Image de cheque microfiche, selon ie ces: Ie symbols — »> signifie "A SUIVRE", Ie symbols V signifie "FIN". Les cartes, plenches, tableeux, etc., peuvent Atre f limAs k dee taux de reduction diffirents. Lorsque Ie document est trop grand pour dtre reprodult en un seui clich«, II est film* i partir de I'angle sup4rleur gauche, de gauche A droite, et de heut en bss, en prenent Ie nombre d'images nAcessalre. Les diagrammes suivants illustrent Ie mAthode. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 '.A.TrmOTtXZJBT> TE^KT-BOOKIS. Ak Ijs^troductory Latijst Book. Intended as an Elementary Drill Book on the Inflections and Princi- ples of the Language, and as an Introduction to the author's Gram- mar, Reader, and Composition. By Albert Harkness, Ph. D^ Professor in Brown University. ISmo. 16a Pages. A Latix Grammak. For Schools and Colleges. By Albert Harknsss, Ph. D., Professor in Brown University. ISi-no, 3o5 Pages. A Latijs^ Reader. Intended as a Companion to the author's Latin Grammar ; with Ref- erences, Suggestions, iVotes, and Vocabulary. By Albert Harkness, Ph. D,, Professor in Brown University. 12nao. 212 Pages. A First Greek Book. Comprising an Outline of the Forms and Inflections of the Language, a complete Analytical Syntax, and an Introductory Greek Reader, with Notes and Vocabularies. By Albert Bareness, Ph. D., Pro- fessor in Brown University, author of Harkness's Latin Grammar, &c., &c. ISmo. t276 Pages. corr, CLARK a) co., PUBLISHERS, 17 and 19 KING STBEET EAST, TORONTO. r-BooK:s-»» COPP, CLARK d CO:S PUBLICATIONS. uiKNESS, Ph. D., Professor A Latin Grammar for Schools and Colleges. By A. HARKNESS, Ph.D., Profedser in Brown UniTereity. To explain the general plan of the work, the Publishers ask the attention of teachers to the following extracts from the Preface : 1. Tliis Toliime is designed to present a systematic arrangement of the great facts and laws of the Latin language ; to exhibit not only grammatical forms and constructions, but also those vital principles which underlie, con- trol, and explain them. 2. Designed at once as a text-book for the class-room, and a book of reference in study, it aims to introduce the beginner easily and pleasantly to die first principles of the language, and yet to make adequate provision for the wants of the more advanced student. 3. By brevity and conciseness in the choice of phraseology and compact- oess in the arrangement of forms and topics, the aui,hor has endeavored to compress within the limits of a convenient manual an amount of carefully- selected grammatical facts, which would otherwise fill a much larger volume. 4. He has, moreover, endeavci«d to present the whole subject in the light of modem scholarship. Without encumbering hi spages with any un. necessary discussions, he has aimed to eurich them with ihs practical resvdti of the recent labors in the field of philology. 6. Syntax has received in every part special attention. An attempt has been made to exhibit, as clearly as possible, that beautiful system of laws which the genius of the language — that highest of all grammatical authority —has created ?jr itself. 6. Topics which require extended illustration are first presented in their completeness in general outline, before the separate points are discussed in detail. Thus a single page often foreshadows all the leading features of an •extended discussion, imparting a completeness and vividness to the impress- Ion of the learner, impossible under any other treatment. 7. Special care has been taken to explun and illustrate with the requisite fulness all difficult and intricate subjects. The Subjunctive Mood — that severest trial of the teacher's patience — ^has been presented, it is hoped, in a n.\rTu2, at GltCO SIIij^ic oliu COuipr6u0u51T6« I /= F /t // ^ AEI^fOLD'S ^' t^i t!^ ■X FIRST LATIN BOOK; REMODELLED AND REWEITTEN, AND ADAPTED TO THB OLLENDORFF METHOD OF mSTRUCTM. BT ALBERT HARKNESS, P. D., lOMRUOB 0» tin SBICX lANOUAM AND UTSIUTUBB VH VBaym UKITIBSITT. •A ^ L •■ X ;__^'v_y V-' i ^o-* ^-« -^ — ' ■ V 5t S i TORONTO: COPP, CLARK & CO., 1871. Entbbkd. according to Act of Congress, in tho year 1S51, by D. APPLETON & CO., I« the Clerk's Office of the District Court of tho Unite.l States for tho Soutben. District of New York. PREFACE. As.^old'b' First arid Second Latin Book was intioducod to tlio American public some five years since, under the editorial care of Professor Spencer. As the system was, at that time, quite new in this country, and comparatively so in England, the Ame- rican editor did not think it best " to make any material alteration in the origmal work.'* The maiked favor with which the volume was at once received, and the ahnost unprecedented success which has since attended it, are a suflScient proof of its excellence. The test of the class-room and the improved methods of instruc- tion have, however, convinced teachers that, with many rare merits, and with a general plan most happily adapted to the wants of the be^er in Latm, it was still, in some important respects, quite incomplete in its execution and details. The pre- sent volume, undertaken at the request of the publishers, is the result of an attempt to remove these defects, and thus to rendei "^ PREFAOB. the work wortl,y of yet higher favor and success. The enti« book baa been r6^vrittel: and many important additions Imvc been made. The Latin of the First and Second Latin Book baa been re- taincd, 80 far as consistent with our pui-pose ; but as it baa been found necessaiy to add many new selections, care baa been taken to secure pure classic Latin, by resorting exclusively to tie pages of Caesar and Gcero. In the preparation of this book, it baa been a leading object mtb the editor, so to classify and arrange the various topics as to simplify^ and, as far as possible, to remcyve tbe disheartening difficulties too often encomitered by th-, learner at the very ou^ set in the study of an ancient language. He has accordingly endeavored so t« present each new subject as to enable the be- gimier fuUy to master it, before he is called upon to perplex himself wia its more difficult combinations. ITio lessons have been prepared with constant reference to the Ollendorff method of instruclion, while, at the same time, special pains have been taken to present a complete and systematic outline, both of the gram- maticaJ forms and of the elementary principles of the Language. An effort has thus been made to combine the respective advan- tages of two systems, distinct in themselves, but by no means inconsistent with each other. In the earlier portions of the book, the exercises for ti-anslation consist of two paragraphs of Latin sentences and two of Englisl^ rUEFACK. the first of each being designed to illustrate the pai'ticular topic wliich diances to be the subject of the lesson, and the second to furnish miscellaneous examples on the various subjects already learned. Thus each lesson becomes at once an advance and n review. For convenience of reference and for the purposes of general review, a summary of Paradigms and an outline of Syntax have been appended to the lessons. The Syntax will bo found, it is hoped, to be an improvement, at least in oint of classification and arrangement, upon tliat ordinarily presented m Latin Gram- mars. In a Second Latin Book, now in preparation — being at once a Reader and an Exercise Book — the editor contemplates a fuller development and illustration of the Latin Syntax, in a series of exercises on the principle of analysis and syntJiesis. The present volume, as aheady intimated, has been prepared mainly fi-om AxnoM)^^ First and Second Latin Book; the editor has, however, had before him numerous other works of a kindred character, fi-om some of which he has derived valuable aid. Among these may be mentioned, m addition to the various Latin Grammare in use in this country and in England, Allen's New Latin Delectus; Analysis of Latin Verbs, by the same author; and Pinnock's First Latin Grammar ; together with numerous othei elementary works, among which the editor is happy to specilj the Fust Latin Book, by Professors M'Clintock and Crooks. Pi-ofessor Spencer's edition of Arnold's Latin Prose Compo PRKFACa. liii in rife«, ow of fte volumes of iio ccellent Classical Series pub l^Bod by the Mess-s. Appleton, has been consulted ,ith much advantage. For valuable assistance in the preparation of the Syntax tl,e editor IS happy to acknowledge his indebtedness to Greene's Ana- lysis of the English Language. lV)Tidonoo, July 18, 1851. A. HARKNESS. CONTENTS. INTRODUCTION. PRONUNCIATIOlf. L Letters . . . , IL Syllables . III. Quantity . , IV. Accentuation . , V. Sounds of the Letters , I. The Continental Method n. The English Method fago. 1 9 . 3 S . 8 8 . 4 LESSONS AND EXERCISES. liCBSOU. I Parts of SpeecL— Proposition.— Subject.— Predicate , 1 IL Verbs.— First Conjugation .... 8 IIL First Conjugation— continued , .11 IV. Second Conjugation . , , .12 V. Third Conjugation . , ,14 VL Fourth Conjugation . , ig VIL Four Conjugations. — Plural Number . , 17 VIIL Nouns. — ^Nominative Case . . .19 IX. Nominative Case — continued , , 23 X. Vocativ«.ir^^^ 0/ Ji»<«„, page 2Y5; the s^all letters to Ca.^,-^,, page 277. the work""'"^ '"'^"''"^ ^ ^"'°*^'''' ''''' *° .^^^^^ ^ ^« '^J^ «' to the Exercises, words connected by hyphens are to be i^nUen^d irf^ Latin by a single word ; as, nctural-to^n, homaniis ; iH^ est, Ao. \- .r ,.' .# INTEODUCTION, ■^ PRONUNCIATION. The two Methoda, the Continental and the Englisli, wliich at pres- ent prevail in the pronunciation of Latin, dift'er from each other chiefly in the sounds of the vowels ; we shall accordingly first state the settled principles in which they agree (as accent, quantity, &c.)i and then present the vowel sounds of each separately, hoping, how- ever, that, in this country, the Continental Method v\dll soon com- mend itself to general favor. With the important merit of uniform consistency, it is, at the same time, the only pronunciation intelli- gible on the Continent of Europe, the very place where the Ameri- can scholar will most need liis Latin as a medium of communication. L LETTERS. The Latin Language lias six cliaracters, or letters, representing vowel sounds, and nineteen representing consonant sounds. Eem. 1. The vo-we] sounds are a, e, i, o, u, and y; the consonanta are the same aa in English, with the omission of w, 'which is not used in Latin. Rem. 2. Two vowels sometimes unite in sound, and form a diphf . thong, as in English ; e. g., e. 2) The short sound if foHowed by a consonant : as f^it, rem; except post, monosyllahhs in es, and plural cases m os ; as, hos (a plural case). ® In an accented penult, vowels have 1) The Zon^ sound before a vowel, diphthonrr, single consonant, or a mute foUowed by ?, r, or h; %^ dL pater, patres; except tibi and sibi 2) Theslwrt sound before a double consonant or any two smgle consonants except a mute followed bv ^, r, or h; as, helium, rexit. ^ have ^^ ""^^ '"'''''^'^ ^^^^''^^' ^"""^^^^ *^® P^"""^*' ^^^^^^ _ 1) The hng sound before a vowel or diphthong- as ^,»„ aT I™"' """""^ ''^ P'=«'°'<-i fa the same M flat r.™ m Andrews and Stoddard's Latin Grammar, aiid. like that i, wi upon TTalker's Key to the Pronnndation of Gr^ldj^ p^^ ' Nomea rn,o r^e,. however, n^e those of A^i" S^d^^^ » prepared as to show the sounds of the vowels, in aU ttSt^o™ ^tuafous, « ependently of the division of words i^to .XblT ^ « fa hu|K-a, Will laciliiute their application. ^ -ii^« SOUNDS OF THE LETTEIIS. 5 2} The shmt souiid before a consonant, as o in dominus: except, a) U before a single consonant, or a mute followed by r or h (and perhaps Z) ; as, Punicus^ salvhritm. h) A, e, and o, before a single consonant (or a mute before ?, r, or h\ followed by e or i before another vowel; as, doceo, dcria. {(1) In all unaccented syllaUes, vowels have the short sound; as, cantdmits, vigilat: except, 1) Final a in words of more than one syllable. This has the sound of a/i, as in the word America; e. g., musa {musah). 2) Final syllables in i (except tihi and sihi), es, and OS, in plural cases ; as, homini, dies, ilhs (a plural case). 3) The first syllable of words accented on the second, when the first either begins with an i followed by a sin- gle consonant, or contains i before a vowel ; as, diebus, irdtus. Rem. E, o, and «, unaccented before a vowel, diphthong, a emglo consonant, or a mute followed by /, r, or h, are not quite as short in sound as the other vowels in the same situations. 2. The Sounds of the Diphthongs. M and ce, like e in the same situation ; e. g., Cvesar, Daedalus. Au, as in the English, author; e. g., aurum. Eu, " " neuter; e. g., neuter (both Eng. and Latin). Ei, as in the English, height; e. g., dein. Oi, " " coin; e. g., proin. Rem. 1. The vowels in ei and oi are generally pronounced ecptv Rem. 2. A few other combinations seom sometimes to be used (i8 1 1 naST LATIN BuOK. diphthonga. U is always tho first element of these comlana tions, and Las then the sound of w; as,,ua _ 6. The anali/sis of a proposition consists in separat- ing It into Its elements. ExAMPLEl-Proposition,P«.>(theboy)?i2ci?i (plays). P«er (the boy) m the sulsect, because it is that of which the proposition speaks (8). ZadU (plays) is tho predicate, because it is that which is said of the sub- JGCt \oj. Example 2.— Proposition, A7nas (thou lovest). Amos IS the predicate, because it is that which is said of the subject. Thou, the subject in English, is omitted in Latin, because the ending a., of the predicate dmcL<, tullj implies it, 7. Exercise in Analysis."^ ludet {mllpla^j). Pater (the father) yidebit M^ J. Mater {the mother) ridebat (z.a. laughing). Currebat (/^ t.a5 rz.m,%). Cantabit (/.e t..7^ .zr^^). Ludebat (^ was playinq). AiHUt {he was phiighing) LESSON II. Verhs.^-First Conjugation. 8. A VERB expresses existence, condition, or action (ersr l^~r -^ xv . ' ' ^^'^' " *^ nr .««// , -vV . , . "" pronoiui to express emphasis or con^ras^ wdl be considered in anotlier place. 9—13.] VERBS. — FIRST CONJUGATION. 9 or tiling^ called its subject): as, est^ lie is; dornut^ he sleeps (is sleeping, or is asleep); dmdt, he loves. 9. When a verb expresses simply its meaning, with- out reference to any person or thing, as dmare, to love, it is said to be in the Infinitive Mood, 10. When a verb expresses its meaning in the form of an assertion or question, referring to its subject, a^ dmat, he love?, it is said to be in the Indicative Mood* 11. A verb may represent its subject, 1) As acting in present time ; as, dmdt, he loves. It is then said to be in the Present Tense. 2) As acting in past time ; as, dmabdt, he was lov- ing. It is then said to be in the Imperfect Tense. 3) As acting in future time (i. e., about to act) ; as, dmahit, he will love. It is then said to be in the Future Tense.* 12. A verb may represent its subject, 1) As speaking of himself; as, dmo, I love, and then both subject and verb are said to be in the First Person. 2) As spolcm to ; as, dmds, thou lovest, and then both subject and verb are said to be in the Second Person. 8) As spohen of; as, dmdt, he loves, and then both subject and verb are said to be in the Third Person. 13. A verb may represent its subject, 1) As consisting of only one person or thing ; as, dmdt, he, she, or it loves, and then both su3- ject and verb are said to be in the Singular Number. * The oihcvmocik and leiiscs -will be noticed ir another place 10 FIRST LATIN BOOK. . ! II I [14-16 2) As consisting of 'inore ihan one person or tiling ; as, dmantj they love ; and tlien botli subject and verb are said to be in the Plural JSFurnler, 14. Every verb consists of two parts, viz. : 1) The Hoot, or that part of the verb which re- mains unchanged throughout the various moods, tenses, numbers, and persons; as, dm in dmSie, dmo, amut, and amabit. 2) TJie Endings which are added to this root, to form the moods, tenses, numbers, and persons ; thus, in the forms just noticed — ^viz., amar^ amo, simdtj and amdhit — the endings are, drej o, ^ at, and d^t. 15. Some verbs have the infinitive in are; as, dm- . «re, to love. These are said to be of The First Conjugation. 16. In verbs of this conjugation, 1) The root is found by dropping the infinitive ending are; as, amdre; root, dm, 2) The third persons singular of the present, inir perfect, and future tenses of the indicative are formed by adding to tliis root the following endings : Present. Imperfect. Future. at, abat, abit. PARADIGM. Amare, to love : root, dm. Present. Am-at, he, she, or it loves (or, is loving). TinnP.rfl>(>t. Am-flTlnt " " " irrna \ry-,Anr. X" 7 Tr*»tj ivTiili;* Future. Am-abit, « " « will love (will be lo\ing). J7— 19.J VERBS.— FIRST CONJUGATION. 11 17. Vocabulary. Latin. Meaning. Amare, to love Arare, to plough Cantare, to sing Laborare, to labor Vigilare, to watch JTcy-ttHWcfc.* (amorous), (arable). (canto), (laior). (vigilanty, 18. Exercise. 1. Laborat.f 2. Cantat. 3. Arat. 4. Arabat. 5. Amabat. 6. Yigilabat. 7. Yigilabit. 8. Cantabit 9. Laborabit. 10. Yigilat. 11. Laborabat. 12. Ama- bit. 13. Amat. 14. Cantabat. 15. Arabit. LESSON III. First Conjugation — continued. 19. Vocabulary. Ambillare, to walk (ambulatory). Jurare, to swear. Pognare, to fight (pugnacious). Saltare, to dance. . Spgrare, to hope. Vocare, to call (vocation). ^^^ * These Key-"wor(l3, derived from the Latin, are introduced partly aa a key or help to the learner, in fixing the meaniog of the Latin, and partly as Bpecunena of English dorivatives of Latin origin. I The subject of each of these verbs may be, in English, either he, she^ or iL The ending, at, shows the number and person of the subject, but not itfl gender (see Paradigm). When the subject is thus omitted in Latin, wo can usually determine from the connection which subject to use, just as in English wo determine the meaning of the pronoun tliey. which may represent eitlier tilings or persons, and either males or /e- 'jw/fi In these exercises the pupil may use he as the subject L2 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [20—22. 20. In Englisb, tlie tenses, numbers^ and persons of verbs are indicated by certain words or signs; as, Present Imperfect. Future. IleloYCS, //e 16-05 loving, IlewiinoYe. In Latin, however, no sncTi signs are used; but their place is supplied by the endings of the verb, nonce, in translating English into Latin, t)mit tnese signs and express the tense, number, and jperson of the verb by the jprojper endings ; e. g. : Present. Imperfect Future. En"". iTe loves, Ee was laying, HewillloYQ. Lat. Amat 1 Amabat^ Amabit. 21. Exercises. (a) 1. Saltat. 2. Cantat. 3. Ambulat. 4. Ambu- labat. 5.Jurabat. 6. Yocabat. 7. Sperabat. 8. Spe- rabit. 9. Ambulabit. 10. Saltabit. 11. Jurat. 12. Cantabat. 13. Yocat. 14. Laborabat. 15. Jurabit. (h) 1. He calls. 2. He is ploughing. 3. He hopes. 4. He swears. 5. He is laboring. 6. He was laboring. 7. He was walking. 8. He was dancing. 9. He was sincring. 10. He was ploughing. 11. He will plough. 12 He will call. 13. He will swear. 14. He will hope. 15 He will labor. 16. He is walking. 17. He was hoping. 18. He will walk. 19. He dances. 20. He was fighting. 21. He will sing. LESSON lY. Yefhs.— Second Conjugation. ^. Some Yerbs have 'the infinitive in ere; as, mmor^, to advise. These are said to be of 23—25.] VERBS. — SECOND CONJUGATION. 18 The Second Conjugation. 23. In verbs of this conjugation, 1) The root is found by dropping the infinitive ending ere ; as, monere ; root, m^n. 2) The third persons singular of the present^ im' perfect^ and future tenses of the indicative are formed by adding to this root the following endings : Present. " et, Imperfect. ebat, PARADIGM. FtUure, ebit. Monere, to advise : root, >nim. Present. Mon-et, he, she, or it adviaea (is advising). Imperfect. Mfin-gbat, «♦ " « was advising. Future. M6n-fibit, " « " will advise. 21 Vocabulary. Doc^re, D6l6re, Flere, Manure, Movfire, Nere, Respondere, Ridere, Tlmero, to teach to grieve to weep. to remain. to move to spin. to answer tc laugh to fear, to be afraid (timid). (docile), (doleful). (move). (respond), (ridicule). 25. Exercises. (a) 1. Ridet. 2. Docet. 8. Eespondet. 4. Dolet 5. Dolebat. 6. Nebat. 7. Flebat. 8. Manebat. 9. Mo- \rebat. 10. Movebit. 11. Dolebit. 12. Docebit. 13. Respondebit. 14. Ridebit. 15. Movet. 16. Docebat IT.Manebit. 18. Flet. 19. Ridebat. 20. Nebit. 2 14 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [26, 27. 21. Pugnat. 22. Manet. 23. Pugnabat. 24. Mane- bat. 25. Pugnabit. 26. Manebit. 27. Cantat. 28. Timet. 29. Saltabat. 30. Eespondebat. 31. Ambu- labit. 32. Timgbit. 33. Laborat. 34. Movet. 35 Saltabat. 36. Docebat. 37. Yocabit. 38. Dolebit. {b) 1. He remains. 2. He moves. 3. He weeps. 4. lie spins. 5. He was spinning. 6. He was laughing. 7. He was teaching. 8. He was grievijig. 9. He waa answering. 10. He will answer. 11. He will weep. 12. He will remain. 13. He will spin. 14. He is laugh- ing. 15. He was weeping. 16. He will teach. 17. He teaches. 18. He was moving. 19. He will laugh. 20. He dance^. 21. He laughs. 22. He was call- ing. 23. He was weeping. 24. He walks. 25. He answers. 26. Ho was ploughing. 27. He was laugh- ing. 28. He will sing. 29. He will move. LESSON V. Verhs. — Third Conjugation, 26. Some verbs have the infinitive in ere; as, reger^ to rule. These are said to be of ' The Third Conjugation. 27. In verbs of this conjugation, 1) The root is found by dropping the infinitive ending ere; as, regere; root, reg. 2) The third persons singular of the present^ im- perfect^ and future tenses of the indicative are formed, by adding to this root the following endings: 28. 29.J VERBS.— THIED CONJUGATION. 16 ? ; as, regere^ le infinitive Pretent. it, Imperfect ebat, PARADIGM. Futur*. St. Begird, to rule : root, reg. Present. Reg-It, he, she, w it rules (is ruling). Imperfect, Reg-ebat, « «« « was ruling. Future. Reg-et, « « « will rule. 28. Vocabulary. Bibere, to drink Cadere, to fall Currere, to run Discern, to learn Legere, to read Lodexe, to play Scrlbere, to write (bihler ; as, wine-hibber), (cadence). (current). (disciple). (legible). (ludicrous). (scribe, scribble). 29. Exercises, {a) 1. Lndit. 2. Currit. 8. Discit. 4. Discebat. 5. Scribebat. 6. Bibebat. 7. Bibet. 8. Cadet. 9. Leget 10. Legit. 11. Currebat. 12. Scribet. 13. Scribit. 14. Ludebat. 15. Discet. 16. Laborat. 17. Movet. 18. Cadit. 19. Yocabat. 20. Bidebat. 21. Legebat. 22. Sperat. 23. Dolet 24. Bibit. 25. Jurabat. 26. Flebat. 27. Cadebat. 28. Arabit. 29. Bespondebit. 30. Ludet. (5) 1. He writes. 2. He drinks. 8. He falls. 4. He was falling. 5. He was reading. 6. He was playing. 7. He will play. 8. He will run. 9. He will learn. 10. He learns. 11. He was writing. 12. He will read. 13. He is playing. 14. He was running. 15. He will fall. 16. He is figbting. 17. He fears. 18. Ho reads. 19. He was singing. 20. He was spinning. 21. He was learning. 22. He will labor. 28. He will re* main. 24. He will write. 16 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [30—88 r LESSON VI. Yefrbs. — Fourth Conjugation. 30. Some verbs have the infinitive in ire; as, avMre^ to hear. These are said to be of The Fourth Conjugation, 81. In verbs of this conjugation, 1) The root is found by dropping the infinitive ending ire; as, avdire; root, avd, 2) The third persms singular oiihQ present^ imper- fectj and future tenses of the indicative are formed by adding to this root the following endings • Pxfiseni Imperfect. Future. it, iSbat, iSt. PARADIGM • Present. Imperfect. Future. AudTrS, to hear : Aud-it, he, she, Aud-iebat, " " Aud-iet, " " root, avd. or it hears (is hearing). " was hearing. " will hear. 32. Vocabulary. Audire, • to hear Custodire, to guard Dormire, to sleep Erudire, to instruct Scire, to know Sitlre, to thirst. Venire, to come. (attdihle). (custody). (dormant), (erudition). (SiHence). S3. Fxercises. (a) X Custodit. 2. Eriidit. 3. Sitit. 4. Sitiebat 6. VeniSbat. 0. Sciebat. 7. Sciet. 8. Audiet. 9. Dormiet. 10. Dormit. 11. Erudiebat. 12. Custodiet 13. Venit. 14. Audiebat. 15. Erudiet. 84.] VERBS. — FOUR CONJUGATIONS. M 16. Ambulat. 17. Docet. 18. Currit. 19. Audit 20. Cantiibat. 21. Ridebat. 22. Ludubat. 23. Dormie- bat. 24. Saltabit. 25. Nebit. 26. Discet. 27. Veniei {b) 1. He thirsts. 2. He knows. 3. He guards. 4. Jle was guarding. 5. He was instructing. 6. He waa coming. 7. He will come. 8. He will hear. 9. Ha will thirst. 10. He will know. 11. He hears. 12. He was thirsting. 13. He will instruct. 14. He sleepa 15. He was hearing. 16. He will guard. 17. He walks. 18. He spins. 19. He runs. 20. He comes. 21. He was dancing. 22. He was teaching. 23: He was writing. 24. He was sleeping. 25. He will sing. 26. He will laugh. 27. He will play. 28. He will instruct. 29. He labors. 30. He was weeping. 31, He will learn. 32. He will sleep. LESSON YH. Verbs. — Four Conjugations. — Plural Number, 34. The Four Conjugations already noticed contain all the regular verbs of the Latin language : hence, . 1) In any regular verb, the root is found by drop- ping the infinitive ending of the conjugation to which it belongs. These endings in the four conjugations are as follows : Con/.L Conj.IL Conj.lIL Conj.17. ar^, ere, dre, irS. a) These endings, it must be observed, differ from each other only in the vowel before re, which is called the characteristic vowel of the coniusration. The char- acteristic vowels in the four conjugations are as follows • 18 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [86. Conj. TL Cmj. IIL Conj. IV. e. Conj. I ^ e, d, L Kmc-— Tuoae vo^rels occur bo frequently in their respective conjuga- (ioDfl, that tliey are called favorite vowels of the conjugaUooA The third conjugation hat also < as a favorite vowel, as in the present ending, W ; e. g^ riyXt, he rules. 2) In any regular verb, the tJiird persms singular of the present, imperfect, and fuXur& tenses of the indicative are formed by adding to the root the endings of the conjugation to which the verb belongs. These endings in the four con- jugations are as follows : Prex Imperf. Fut. Conj. I. « at, abat, abit. IL et, ebat. ebit. m. It, ebat, it IV.. It, iebat, let 85. In any regular verb, the third persons plural, in the tenses already noticed, are formed by simply in- serting n before t in the endings of the third singular, Exa~If t immediately precedes t, it must be changed, in the fourth amjugation, into iu ; ds, audu, he hears ; audiunt, they hear : and in the other conjugations into u; as, UmabXt, he will love ; Umabunt, they will love. PARADIGM. Present. Imperfect. Future. Conj. 1. 1 Sing. •* I Plur. Am-at, am.iUbat, am-abit Am-ant, am-abant, am-abunt. IJ S Sing. ( Plur. Mon-et, mon-ebat, mon-ebit Mon-ent, mon-ebant, m6n-6bMnt '"•Ipi^f Reg-it, reg-ebat. reg-et. Reg-wnt, reg-ebant, reg-ent '^•Ipi^ Aud-it, aud-iebat, aud-ISt A, -.A :..~* _,.J JjsV- A „ J • ... xxuu-^u/ci, auuncuu/ii, • 36, 37.] NCUNS.— NOMINATIVE CASE. 10 86. Exercises. (a) 1. Saltat 2. Saltant. 3. Ambulabat. 4, Ambu- liibaut. 5. Arabit. 6. Arabunt. 7. Docet. 8. Decent 9. Timiibat. 10. Timebant. 11. Ridebit. 12. Rido- bunt. 13. Ladit. 14. Ludunt. 16. Scribebat. 16. Scribebant. 17. Curr^t. 18. Current. 19. Dormit 20. Dormiunt. 21. Veniobat. 22. Veniebant. 23. Custodiet. 24. Custodient. 25. Yocant. 26. Dolent. 27. Discunt. 28. Sciunt. 29. Saltabunt. 30. Move- bant. 31. Legebant. 32. Eradiebant. 33. Jurabunt 34. Manebunt. 35. Cadent. 36. Sitient. (6) 1. He sings. 2. Thej sing. 3. He was swearing. 4. They were swearing. 5. He will labor. 6. Tlie> will labor. 7. He laughs. 8. They laugh. 9. He was spinning. 10. They were spinning. 11. He will re- main. 12. They will remain. 13. He runs. 14. They run. 15. He was playing. 16. They were plapng. 17. He will drink. 18. They will drink. 19. Ho knows. 20. They know. 21. He was guarding. 22. They were guarding. 23. He will hear. 24. They will hear. 25. They walk. 26. They answer. 27. They write. 28. They sleep. 29. They were plough- ing. 30. They were teaching. 31. They were learn- ing. 32. They were instructing. 33. They will sing. 34. They willVeep. 35. They will read. m. They will come. LESSON Ym. Nouns. — Nominative Case. 87. In Latin, as in Eno-lisTi. nil Tjompa •orhofKov t\f persons, places, or things, are called Nmns; as, Ccesar; pi'^i a boy, &c 20 riRST LATIN BOOK. [38 — ^^ Rbl 1^~ Names of hulividual peraomi or objects we called propel nount; as, C-m?r (bravely) and nUn (not) are adverti modifying pugnit In Latin the adverb generally precedes the verb, as m these iostancea 78. VoCABULAltY.* Anguis, nnguis, c. Chriatianus, i, m. Forttter, Lex, legTs,/. Mater, matrls, Negligere, Non, PastSr, pastoris, PecQnia, ae,/ Servius, I, Vox, VOCJB,/ snake, serpent. Christian bravely. law mother to disregard not shepherd money Servius, a marCs name. voice (yoctOi. (Christian). 1 (kgaO- ' (maternal), (neglect). (pastor), ' (pecuniary). mi 79. Mcercises, Q ^^) ^' nf •'''^' P""^^*- ^- ^^'^^ f^^^^ Pugnat. 3. Mors Christianum wonf terret 4. Agricola anguem fimebit 5. Agricola anguem nm timebit 6. Pater ♦ In this and the foUowing Vocabularies, either the genitive or its cDdmg IS given unmediately after each substantive. t In translating ndn before a verb. tAsw^ 'nM> oft.. *i,. ■Z^^^..^ ense-sign ; thus, non terrSt, does not t'errify, or « not terrify^r^ 80, 81.] NOUNS. — DATIVB CASE. 96 filiain audiebat. 7. Pater fllii vocem audiobat. 8. Ma- ter vocera negllget. 9. Mater filiae vocem non negllget. 10. Gains legem negligebat. 11. Christianus pecimiam negltget. 12. Pecuniam negltgent. 13. PuSrum decent. 14. Christianus mortem non timet. (6) 1. The husbandman will fight. 2. The husband- man will not fight. 8. Senrius fears death. 4. Serviua does not fear death. 5. The slave hears the voice of (his) master.' 6. The boj was killing the dog. 7. The boy was kilhng the shepherd'-s dog. 8. The dog will •nat bite. 9. Servius will avenge the death of the king. 10. They do not fear death. 11. They will fight bravely. 12. Caius is teaching the boy. 13. The daughter of the queen is singing. 14. They did not hear (were not hearing). 15. They will not disregard the law. . LESSON XY. Nouns.— Dative Case.— Indirect Ob/ect of Predicate. 80. The Dative Case in Latin corresponds to the db- j'ecHve with to or /or in English; as, musa, a muse; Dat. musacj to or for a muse. 81. The Dative Singular of a noun may be formed by adding to its root one of the following DATIVE ENDINGS. J)ec.L ae, Dee. IL Dee. IIL Dee. IV. 0. I, ui* DecY. Sl.f • Neuter nouns of the fourth declension are exceptions, as tliey have "J tt«t5i-c si7ttpiiar iiK6 tiie iwininaiive. t In this ending e is long except in spSi, fldSi, and rSl. 86 FIRST LATIN BOOK. EXAMPLES. [82-^ . Genitive. Hoot. Ending. Dative. Doc. I. Mflsae, of a muse; m s - ae ; mosae, to ox for a muse. IL Sem, of a slave ; serv -o; servo, « « a slave. III. Honoris, o/Ronor; honor -I, • honOrl, « « anTwnor. IV. FructQB, of fruU; fruct -ul; fructui, " « afruU. V.Di&X,ofday; di -6l;dier, « "^ aday. 82. The person or thing to or for which any thing is, or is done, is called an indirect object; e. g., Balbiis^wero viam monstrSt. {Balbus to the hoy the way shows.) Balbus shows the way to the hoy. Rem.— In the example it wiU be observed that the indirect object precedes the direct. This is the more common order, though not unfrequently reversed. 83. Rule of Syntax.— Any transitive verb may take the accusative of the direct object and the dative of the indirect object, 84. Vocabulary. (close). AccQsare, to accuse. Bellum, I, n. war. Claudere, to shut Condere, to found, to build. I>are,* to give. Domus, domas, or dorm,f. house , (domestic). Evertere, to pull down, to overthrow. ^d'cere, to declare (as war). Le8, leOnTs, m. Hon. Miles, Itis, m. (rarely/), soldier (military) * D&rv is of the first COnin(ril.finn wifli X ahnw* /./»,»M_ *^ ral rule. f wuvzcuY w ih€ 85.] NOUNS. — INDIRECT OBJECT. 87 ve. far a muse. \ M a slave. «( an honor. U afrmt. U adajf. Porta, ae,/. Reperire, Romulus, I, gate to find. Romulus, J (portal), \ (porter). Sceptrum, I, n. Urbe. 18,/. tU founder of Rome, sceptre, city 85. Exercises. (wham) (a) 1. Pastor viam monstrat. 2. Pastor puh-o viam monstrat. 8. Pucr viam monstrabit. 4. Puer pasWn viam monstrabit. 6. Servus portam claudet. 6. Ser- vus regi portam claudet. 7. Romulus urbem condebat. 8. Agricola anguem repSrit. 9. Miles agricolae domum evertet, 10 Re^is sceptrum videbant. 11. Militi viam monstrant. • 12 Leonem timebant. © 1. The slave is building awall. 2. The slave is bmlding a wall > tJw king. 3. The boy was showing he road. 4. The boy was showing the road to the hmhandman. 5. The , husbandman is showing the 7. They are founding a city for the queen. 8. They ivill not disregard the law. 9. They were writing for tlie king. 10. They will accuse the boy. 11 T^el were praising the queen. 12. They will praise the queen s daughter. 13. The king will dito war » the senate. 14. The king will give the citjT 3 88 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [80-69 LESSON XVL : Nouiis. — Ablative Case. — Modified Predicate, 86. The Ablative Case in Latin corresponds to the ob- jective with from, by, in, or mth in English ; as, rnusd, a muse ; Abl. rnusd, from a muse, or by, in, or vnth a muse.* 87. The Ablative Singular of a noun may be formed by adding to its root one of the following ABLATIVE ENDINGS. EXAMPLES. Oenitive. Hoot. Ending. Ablative. Dec. I. Mosae, of a muse ; m Q s - a ; mQsa, from, in, &c., a muse. U. Servl, of a slave ; serv -6; servo, « « « a slave. in. Honoris, o/*Ao7U)r; honor- e; honOre, " " " honor. IV. FructUB, of fruit ; fruct -Q;fructQ, « « •« fmit. Y.Bi&J, of day; di -6; die, " " « jay. 88. The predicate may be modified by a noun denot* ing the time of an action ; e. g., Eieme ursus dormit. (In winter the bear sleeps.) The bear sleeps (when?) in winter, 89, EuLE OP Syntax.— The time when is put in the ♦ The prepoaition is, however, often expressed before the ablative, ai it ia before t]>e objective in English. f Aa an exception to this, a few nnuna of the third dedensicn fens Uie ablative in 7, as we ehall see by-and-by. [8a-«9 licate. Is to the ob- ; as, musdj ij or tvith a be formed Dee. V. e. Ive. &c., a muse. " a s2ave. « fconor. « /ruit « day. oun denot" put in the he ablative, a> /•lonaTrkYi fnrm 90—93.] NOUNS.— MODIFIEr PREDICATE. 39 ablative without a preposition (i. e., without any word for the English a/, w, &c.) RKM—The ablative of time often stands first in a sentence, aa in tho example. 90. The predicate may be modified by a noun denot- ' "g the phce of its action ; e. g., Ursiis in antro dormit (The bear in a cave sleeps.) The bear sleeps (where ?) in a cave. 91. EuLE OF Syntax— The name of a place where any thing is, or is done, when not a town (227), is gener- J'lly put in the ablative with a preposition. t^ The pupil, m preparing bis exercises, should imitate the order m the examples, whenever nothing is said on the point. 92. Vocabulary. Aestas, atiB,/. Ager, Sgri, m. Antrum, r, n. Asinus, I, m. Avis, 18,/. Dilauiare, Equiis, I, m. Hiems, emls,/. Hortus, I, m. In (prep, with abl), Locus, I, m. Mons, tis, m. Pratum, i, n. Ursils, I, m. summer. field cave. ass. bird to tear in pieces. horse winter. garden in. grove. mountain. meadow. bear. (agriculture). (aviary). (equestrian). (horticulture). 93. Exercises, (a) 1. Ursus dormit. 2. Ursus in antro dormit. 8 ~~"' ^^^^^- ^. v^uriis in norco currit. 5. Puer lude- bat. 6. Puer in agro ludebat. 7. Hi^me ursus in 40 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [94, 95. antro dormiet. 8. Romulus urbem condebat. 9. Ko miilus ujbem in monte condebat. 10. nieme ursus in antro dormit. 11. Servus regem occidet. 12. Leo asmum dilaniat. 13. Rex reginam accusabat 14. Regina filiam docebit. 15. In luco ludunt. 16. Leo squum dilaniabit. {h) 1. The bpy is playing. 2. The boy is playing in the garden. 3. The dog is running. 4. The dog is running in the meadow. 5. The bird will not sing. 6. The bird will not sing in winter. 7. The daughter was singing in the grove. 8. They wiU walk in the field. 9. They will play in summer. 10. Balbus will fear Caius. 11. They will fear the queen. 12. He was building a wall. 13. They are building a wall. 14. The queen is walking in the field. 15. The queen's mother was weeping. 16. The slave is showing the boy (to the boy) the way. 17. The slave was shutting the gate. 18. The boy wHl shut the gate. LESSON XYIL Nouns. — First Declension.^ 94. To the First Declension belong all nouns which have the genitive in ae (62). They all end in a (except a few GreeJc nouns. See 174). 95. Latin nouns of this declension are grammatically feminine ; unless their gender is determined by their ngnificationj according to previous rules (40, 44). * Having learned in the previous Lessons the me of the several edset af the Latin lanffuacre. the nn-nil win nn-nr fln^l lu+u /i;«!«„n^ ,• a— .,, t_. . - i- - i — •• ..,,..v- viiitiviiiLjr ui stitmivir ing the Jive declemions (62) in all the cases of both numbers. e several cdset 96 — 98.] NOUNS.— FIRST DECLENSION. 41 96. We have already learned that the root of a noun may always be found from the genitive singular (69, 1), but, as it may also be formed without much difficulty from the nominative, it will be weU for us to notice, in connection with the different declensions, tlie manner in which this may be done. 97. In the First Declension, 1) The root may be found by dropping the nomi- native ending a, as musd; root, mus (69, 1). 2) Any noun mai/ he declmed (i. e., aU the cases of both numbers may be formed) by adding to the root the following CASE-ENDINGS. Sing. Plur. Noni. ac. Gen. ae, arum, Dat. ae, Is, Accus. as. Voe. a, ae, Abl a, Is. TARADIGM. U Singular. Nom. Mos-a, a muse. Gen. Mos-ae, o/" a Tnuse. Dat. Mos-ae, tOyfar a muse. MQ8-5m, a muse. Mos-a, O muse. Mqs-5, from, &c. a muse. Ace, Voc Abl. Plural. Nom. MQs-ae, muses. Gen. Moa-arum, of muses. Dat. Moa-ls, to, for muses. Ace. Mos-as, mzises. Voc. Mos-ae, O muses. Abl. MQ8-i8,/rom, &c. muses. 98. Vocabulary.* Aperire, to open, to uncover Aquila, ae, eagle Caput, itis, n. head Columba, ae, dove. (aperture), (aquiline), (capital). The pupa must apply rules for gender ^ 'ii !' f mvii 42 Corcna, ae, Dolor, Oris, n, Lu8ciD'"5, ao, Ridere, Sentire, Vlnclre, PIllST LATIN BOOK. garland, crown pain, grief, Borrow nightingale.' S to laugh, ) ( to laugh at S 5 to feel, to perceive ( by the senses. ^ to bind, ( to bind up. 99. Exercises, [99 (coroiuUwiCi, {dolorous), (ridicule). (a) 1. Puellae saltant. 2. Aquilae volant. 3 Ro glna puella^ docebit. 4. Tulliae filiae ridebunt. 5. Tulliae^ filias ridebit. 6. Aquila columbas occidet. 7. Jjuscmiae cantabant. 8. Balbus vocem audit. 9. Caius dolorem vitabit 10. Puellae dolorem sentiunt. 11. Servus epistolaa Bcribit. 12. Puer caput vinciebat. 13. Re^a puellae coronam dabit. 14. Regina puellis coronas dabit. . • {l>) 1. The girl was writing a letter. 2. The girls are writing letters. 3. The queen will call (her) daugh- ter. 4. The queen is calling (her) daughters. 6. Tul- ha will give a garland to her daughter. 6. They wiU give garlands to (their) daughters. 7 He IS reading the queen's letter. 8.. They are reading the girls letters (the letters of the girls). 9 They will show the way to the queen. 10. The husband- man will shut the gate. 11. The doves wiU fly 12 The nightingales are singing. 13. The boy hears (his) others voice. 14. The boy is opening the letters. 15. The slave will open (his) master's letters. h ki 100—103.] NOUNS.--fiEOOND DECLENSION. 43 LESSON xvni. Nouns.— Second Dechnsion.—N'ouns in iis and iim. 100. To the Second Declension belong all nouns which have the genitive singular in i (62). They end in us, um, er, and %r (except a few Greek nouns. See 174). ' 101. In this declension nouns in urn are grammati- cally neuter; and the rest (with a few exceptions*) are grammatically masculine; uixiess theh- gender is deter- mmed by their signification, according to previous rules (40, 44). 102. In nouns in ws and urn, of this declension, the root IS found by dropping the mminative ending • as, servos, a slave; root, serv: regn-Hm, a kingdom; root 7'egn. ^ 103 Nouns in ih are declined by adding to the root tJie lollowmg CASE-ENDINGS. It hM not be™ tho-jght best to barden the memoiy of th, !«„» mti UH, rf exceptio,^. .t thi. early stage of hi, ^, a«St ,^al rule., covering the great maj«ity ot.^^^,^ f^S <^ «d cmHant „«; thus the pupa may fa the ge.Ll priuZ3 ttemepfona as they «xur ■„ hi, less.™. Such exceptions, ^ rrlauung to gender or other subject^ ^ be n^led 'liiX^. > in th- ,^!V- • , *• ^""^ "x™" *" •■«• *op the ending Uvel^"""' " «"*^ "«*'• ■J'" *«.?«.« ending » in the too.' 44 FIRST LATIN BOOK. Paradigm. [104 Singular. Nom. Serv-ufl, a slave. Gen. Serv-i, of a slave. Dat. Serv-0, /o, for a slave. Serv-um, a slave. Serv-e, O slave. Serv-O, /row, % a slave. Ace. Voc. Abl. Nom. Serv-i, slaves. Gen. Serv-orum, of slaves. Dat. Serv-ls, to, /or sZares. Ace. Serv-os, slaves. Voc. Serv-i, O sZores. Abl. Serv.l8,/rom, iy sZavgj. RKM^lWiU bo wcU forthepupU to accustom himself to coznpore NEUTER CASE-ENDINGS. Sing, nm, Plur. a, Gen. h orum, Is, Accus. um, a, Vwf. Abl. a> la PARADIGM. Sitiffitlar. Nom. Rggn-um, a kingdom. Gen. ^^gn-l, of a kingdom. Dat. Rggn-o, to,/or a kingdom. Ace. Regn-um, a HT^ffom. Voc. Regn-um, O Hwg-flfom. Abl. Regn-5,/rom, by a kingdom. s Plural Nom. Regn-a, kingdoms. Gen. Regn-oriim, ^A:ing-dbm». Dat. Rggii.is, to,/or kingdoms. Ace. Regn-a, iin^jfoms. Voc. Rggn-a, O itn^ffom*. Abl. ^egn.TB,from, by kingdoms. ^'^' ^-^ °«"*e" of a]I decle'Lions, the nom., ace, and^i^T^;:;^ ]r;ir " "' ^ ^^ ^^-^ -^ ^ ^'-^ thTp:;:^^ B«i^ 2 -Neuters in iim are declined like masculines in «, of this declension, except in the cases just mentioned („«n. 1 L..^ Compare mradiimin \ —-,_., ., ,^^ ^^^,^ Comj>aro paradigms. 105, 106.] NOIINS.—SECOND DECLENSIOl.. 106. VOCABULAJIY. 15 Agnus, I, DiscTpulua, iy Dominus, r, Gerere, Haedus, i, Lupus, ), Magister, trJ, lamb. pupil master, aa owner S to carry on, Uo (disciple), (domineer). wage (as war), kid. wolf, master, as teacher (magisterial). 106. Exercises. {a) 1. Caius Balbum docebat. 2. Balbus Camm docebat. 3. Servus dominum occidet. 4. Servidomi- nostimcnt. 5. Balbus filios laudabit. 6. Seryus do- mini fihos timet. 7. Servi dominorum filios timebunt. 8 Puellae dolorem sentiebant. 9. Servi muros aedi- ficabunt. 10. Pastor filiis canem dabit. 11. Pastor tiliabus* haedum dabit. {h) 1. Balbus wUl instruct the slave. 2. Caius will punish the pupil 3. They will instruct (their) pupils. 4. The slaves will fear Balbus. 5. The master was punishing (his) slaves. 6. Caius will kill the wolf 7 Wolves will kill lambs. 8. The wolves do not see' (see not) the kids. 9. Caius was waging war. 10. They are waging 'T« t ^f"^ ^'^ ^S'^*- 12. The sons of Baft,J wjU fight. 13. The master is teaching the boys. U. ^e master is teaching his pupils in the garden. 15. T^e girls were walking in the garden. 16. He was fl^r^ 1 = 1 '^^'■^°^- 1''- '^^7 ^U P% ^ the uelds. 18. The slaves were reading (their) master's Som Uw eame cases ot/Uitla. -^"ua v 46 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [107, 108 LESSON XIX. Nouns.— &cond JDechrmon, continued.— Nouns in dr and it. 107. Nouns in er and ir, of the second declension,* have the nominative and vocative singular ahke, and in all the other cases are declined like servUs (103), with the single exception that most nouns in er drop ein the root. PARADIGMS. 1. Gener, a son-in-law : root, gener (e not dropped). Sinfftilar, Nom. Gener, a son-imlaw. Gen. Gener-i, of soiuin-law. Dat. Gener-o, to son-hulaw. Ace. Gener-um, son-in-law. Voc. Gener, O son-in-law. Plural, Nom. Gener-I, sons-in-law. Gen, Gener-OTVim, of sons-in-law. Dat. Gener-I8, to sons-in-law. Ace. Gener-08, sons-in-law. Voc. Gener-I, O sons-in-law. All. Gener-o, from son-in-law. lAhl Gener-lB, from sons-iniauK 2. Agdr, a field : root, agr (§ dropped). Plural. Nom. Agr-J, yields. Gen. Agr-6riim,qffelds. Singular. Nom. Ager, afield. Gen. Agr-l, of afield. Dat. Agr-0, to afield. Ace. Agr-um, afield. Voc. Ager, O field. Abl. Agr-Ct, from a field. Dat. Agt-\% to fields. Ace. 4gr.e8,^Zefc. Voc. Agr-I, O fields. Abl. Agr-ia, from fields. jar Vlr (a man) and its compounds are the only noung in )tr qnd are declined like ghOr. 108. YOCABULARY. Armiger, I, Diligentia, ae, Gener, i. Liber, Ubri, Vulpgs, IS,/ armor-bearer, diligence. son-in-law. book. fox. ^1 100—111.] ADJECTIVES. 109. Exercises. 4tl (a) 1. Puer in agro ludit. 2. Pueri in agris lude bant. 3. Magister pucros docebit. 4. Magistri disci pulos docobunt. 5. Magister pudris libros dabit. 6. Annigerum occidebant. 7. Pater diligentiam (64, h) filiorum laudabat. 8. Rcginae filia in luco ambulabat. 9. Lusciniae in lucis cantant. 10. Magistri legem non negligent. 11. PudrJ vulpem non Occident. {h) 1. The boy was running in the fields. 2. The boys will run in the fields. 3. The boys saw the mas- ter's book. 4. The pupils will give the master a book (a book to the master). 5. They will give books to (their) masters. 6. He will punish the armor-bearer. 7. He will accuse (his) son-in-law. 8. They will accuse (their) sons-in-law. 9. The master was praising (his) pupils. 10. The master was praising the diligence of (his) pupils. 11. The pupils do not hear the master. 12. The slaves will shut the gates of the city. 13. The boys were reading in the garden. 14. The girls are reading in the meadow. LESSON XX Adjectives of tU First and Second Declension, 110. The Adjective is that part of speech which is used to qualify substantives; as, honiis, good; Tnagntia, great. 111. The form of the adjective often depend^-, in part, upon the gfender of the noun which it qualifies : rM 48 FIRSl LATIN BOOK. [112, 118. e. g., B5n.«>' pucr, a good boy; Bonapuella, a good girl; and Bonwn regnum, a good kingdom. Thus, hmi^ is the form of the adjective when used with masc. nouns. bond with/m., and bonum with neuter. 112. These three forms of the adjective are declined like nouns of the same endings. Thus, the mascuHne , IS declmed like servm (103), and is accordingly of the seccid declension ; the feminine like mu,d (97), and is of the /Irst declension ; and the neuter like regnum {lOij, and is of the second declension. PARADIGM. • B onus, good. > SINGULAE. Masc. Fern. Kent. Nom. Bdn-us, bon-a. bon-um. Gen. Bon-i, bon-ae. bon-i. Dat. Bon-O, bon-ae, bon-o. Ace. Bon-um, bon-ani. bon-um. Voc. Bon. 0, bon-a, bon-uro. Abl. Bon-o, bon-a, bon-o. PLUBAL. « Nom. Bon-i, bon-ae, bon-a. Gen. Bon-oruni, bon-ariini, bon-orum. Dat. Bon-Is, bon-ls, bon-is. Ace. Bon-08, bon-as. I bon-5. Voc. Bon-i, bon-ae, b6n-5. Abl. Bon-Is, bon-is. bon-is. Riaf.— Adjectives like the above are caUed adjectives of the Fir,t and Second Declension, because they are declined like nouns of these declensions ; the masc. and neut being declined like nouns of the second declension, and the fern, like tliose of the first 113. Some adjectives of this declension have the wm. and voc. sing, in e>, Hke nouns in er of the second T 'hese, iij all their other forms, are de- 113.] ADJECTIVES, 40 clined like tonus in the Paradigm above, with the ex- ception, that most of them drop S before r of the root in all genders. PARADIGMS. 1. Tener, tender : root, tener (JS not dropped). SINQULAU. Masc. Fern. Neut. Nom. Tener, tener-5, tengr-fim. Gen. Tener-I, tSner-ae, ten5r-l. Dat Tener-0, tendr-ao, tener-0. Ace. Tener-um, ten6r-am, t£n^r-um. Voc. Tener, tener-a. tener-um. Abl. Tener-O, tendr-a, PLOEAL. tener-0. Nom. Tener-I, tener-ae, tener-a. Gen. Tener-Orum, tener-arum, tener-Orum. Dat Tener-Is, tener-ls, tengr-is. Ace. Tener-Os, tener-as, " tener-a. Voc. Tener-I, tendr-ae, tener-a. Abl. Tencr-Is, tener-Is, tener-Is. 2. AegSr, sick : root, a6^r (^ dropped). SINQULAB. Masc. Fern. I^eut. Nom. Gen. Aeger, Aegr-I, aegr-5, aegr-ae, aegr-um. aegr-i. Dat Aegr-0, aogr-ae, aegr-0. Ace. Aegr-um, aegr am, aegr-um. Voc, Abl. Aeger, Aegr-0, aegr-a, aegr-a, rLUKAL. aegr-um. aegr-0. Nom. Gen. Dat Ace. Voc. Aegr-I, Aegr-Orum, Aegr-ls, Aegr-5s, Aegr-I, aegr-ae, aegr-arum, aegr-is, aegr-as, aegr-ae, aegr-a. aegT-orum. aegr-lB. aegr-a. aegr-a. A KfJit -tivyx-ia, aegr-l8, aegr-is. I 1^ \ ' 60 iiiili FIllST LATIN BOOK. L114, 116. Bjut.--The Mowing adjectives have the genitive eingular in lit (tho t is generally short in alterius), and the dative singular in I in aQ genders, vit : Uliiia, another ; nullUs, no one ; tol&a, alone ; tOtUt, the whole; ullUa, any; anUa, one; alih; the other; n«««r,nei. th^ • and iitSr, which (of the two). 114. Rule of Syntax.— Adjectives agree with the nouns which they qualify, in gender, number, and case; e. g., Mat^r hondm f iliam laudSt. (The moth^ (her) good da/ughter praises). The mother praises her good daughter. Rem. l.—The adjective bSnUm is in ihe feminine accusative singular to agree with its norm fiHHnL Rem. 2.— The position of the adjective seems to depend prindpaUy upon emphasis ; and am)rdingly the adjective precedes or follow* its noun, according as it is or is not emphatia In the example, bSnSm is emphatic. Rem. 8.— Jf„i;,,/. =«i.;..»+ « u lit*, imd with a plural subject, their, Ac. ^^ FIRST LATIN BOOK. [118—120 Aviiriis pecuniam amat. {TJie avaricious (man) money loves.) The avaricious man loves money. UiUL-After a plur. adjec. the noun is sometimes expressed and Bometmies omitted in the Eng. translation ; thus, Uvan may be translated avaricioua men, or simply the avaricious. 118. Wlien a noun is Hmited by a genitive, one or both nouns may be qualified by an adjective ; e. g., 1. Magna regis corona. (The great of the king crown,) The king's great crown. 2. Magna boni regis corona. (The great of the good king crown.) The good king's great crown. 119. YOCABULARY. Aureus, a, um, Avaritia, ae, Avarus, a, um, Impius, a, um, Indoctiis, a, um. Labor, Oris, m. Poeta, ae, m. Sapientia, ae, Vindicaz-e golden. avarice. avaricious. impious. unlearned. labor. poet. wisdom. to avenge. 120. JExercises. (a) 1. Auream regis coronam videbant. 2. Servi /nagnam regis coronam videbunt. 8. Balbi domum evertent. 4. Impii domum evertebant. 5. Indoctua sapientiam laudabat. 6. Magnum boni regis sceptrum timebunt. 7. Amici sapientiam tuam laudant. 8. Christiani avariliam vita- bunt. 9. Mater bonas filias laudabat. Q)) 1. He disregards his slave's labor. 2. He disre- 121, 122.] NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 53 gards his slave's great labor. 3. The beautiful daugh- ters of the queen will dance. 4. The poet was holding the beautiful crown. 5. The poet was holding the good queen's bea,utiful crown. 6. The good (man) wiU not disregard the law. 7. The poet will hvgh aV the un- learned (man). 8. The good will not fear df;ath. 9. They wiU avenge the death of iheir father. 10 They were avenging the death of the good (woman). 11. The mipious (man) wHl fear death. 12. The poet will build a beautiful house. LESSON xxn. Nmns and Adjectives,— First and Second Dechnsion contmmd.— Price, Value, and Degree of Estimation. ' 121. The predicate of a proposition may be modified by a noun or adjective denoting price, value, or degree of estimation ; e. g., 1. Avarus patriam auro vendet. {Th^ avaricious (man) {his) country/ for gold wiU sell,) The avaricious man will sell his countiy for gold. 2.^Avarus pecuniam magni aestunat. {The avaricious {man) money at a great {price) values,) The avaricious man values money ai a great price (or highly). 122. Rule of SYNTAX.-Price, when expressed by nouns is generally put in the ablative, and when ex- pressed by adjectives, generally in the genitive. Rkk. l.-The genitive of a fewnouns and the ablativeof a fowadieo- ^^ tives sometimes occur in expressions of price and valua ...^ 2_In example I. the noim anrS is m the ablative, and iu e» ample 2. the adjeoUve 7nagnl is in tJic genitive, by the above rulo 54 FIltST LATIN BOOK. I:!' 123. Vocabulary. Aestlmare, , Aurum, I, Magnl, Magni acstimare, Parvl, Parvl aestlmare, PStria, ao, Proditor, Oris, Vendere, Verus, a, um, VirtQs, Otis, /. I to value gold. at a great price, at a high price. to prize highly, to think highly of. at a little price, at a low price. to think little of. native country traitor. to sell true, reaL virtue. [123, 124 (estimate). (patriotic), (vend). 124, Eocerdses. (a) 1. Impius patriam auro vendebat, 2. Proditor patriam parvi^ aestimabit. 3. Cains anuci sui laborem parvi aestimat. 4. Boni virtutem magni^ aestimant. 6. Eex servum magui aestimabit. 6. Eegina aurSam coronam magni aestimat. 7. Magnam urbis portam claudent. 8. Dominus servi sui epistolas aperiet. 9. ServTis pueros vocabit. (p) 1. Tbe traitor will sell (his) countiy for gold. 2. Caius values true virtue at a groat {pricey 3. The master thinks litth » of the labor of his slave. 4. The poet will feel real sorrow. 5. A father "vvill not disregard the sorrow of his son. 6. The avaricious (man) will value virtue at a low (price).* 7. The avari- cious value money at a high {price).^ 8. Christians - tJiink litth ° of money. liiii! 125, 126.] NOUNS.— TlIIIiD DECLENSION. 56 LESSON XXIIL Nouns.— Third Declension.— Glass L 125. To the TAiVc? j^ecZerwibn belong all nouns which have the genitive singular in is. They end in a, e, ^, 5, y, c, Z, w, r, 5, ^, jr, and may be divided into four classes : 1) Those which have the root the same as the nominative singular (except, in a few in- stances, the omission or change of the radical vowel) : as, mw^ter, a.woman ; root, mulier. 2) Those which form the root by adding a single letter to the nominative singular: as, feo, a lion; root, ledn. 3) Those which form the root by dropping the ending of the nominative singular ; as, urhs^ a city ; root, urh. 4) Those which form the root by changing the ending of the nominative singular: as, pietas^ piety; rooi^pietat. 126. Class I. — This class comprises nouns in c,* ?, w, r, t^ and y. These either have the root the same as the nominative singular, or form it (with a few exceptions) by one of the following slight vowel changes : 1) Nouns in ter and her generally drop e in the root : as, pat^r^ a father ; root, pdtr. 2) Nouns in en generally change e into % in the root: as,/ilwm, ariver; loot, Jtumm. S) Nouns in Ht change H into i in the root : as, cdputj a head; root, cdptt 9 'Vl\AWf\ n»a/^ j-*«-»l to Cliiss IL onlj two U0UI13 xvith iiiis ending, oue of which belongs 56 FIRST LATIIST BOOK. [127, 128. Rem.— The quantity of the radical vowel is sometimes clianged; thia is the case in most nouns in Hi and Sr, which generally lengthen the vowel hi the root. 127. Neuter nouns of this declension have the nomi- native, accusative, and vocative singular alike, and are declined in the other cases by adding to the root the following CASE-ENDINGS. Nom. Gen. Sinrr. IH. Dat. Accus. Voc. Abl. I, - - e(l). Plur. a (la), um (ium), ibus, & (ia), a (ia), ibus. RKM.--The inclost (I endings belong only to neuters in e, al, and ar. ^ PARADIGMS. 2. Animal, w., an animal. \ (root, same as nom.* [126].) 1. Capiit, w., a head. (root, c&pU [126, 8].) Singular. Plural. Nom. CapQt, Caplt-a. Gen. Capit-is, Caplt-um. Dat. Capit-i, Capit-ibiis. Ace. Caput, Cap1t-5. Voc. Caput, Capit-a. I Abl. Capit-e, Capit-ibiis. Singular. Plural. Nom. Animal, Animal-ia. Gen. Animal-is, Animal-ium. Dat. Animal-i, Animal-ibiis. Ace. Animal, Animal-ia. Voc. Animal, Animal-ia. Abl. Animal-l, Animal-Ibiis. 128. Masculine and feminine nouns of this 'declen- sion are declined, in all the cases except the nominative and vocative singular (which are alike), by adding to the root the following CASE-ENDINGS. Nom, Gen. I Plur. 68, um (ium), ibus, es, Sing. — Is, I>at. Ajcus. Voc. Abl. T, em(im), -• e (i). ^B, ibus. ♦ With the radical vowel lengthened (126, Rem.). 129.] NOUNS. — THIRD DECLENSION. 57 Il«ic.--Tbo inclosed endings (except that of the genitive plural, which will be noticed again, 141) belong only to a few words. PARADIGMS. 1. Labor, 77i., labor. 2. Mulier,/, a woman. (root, same aa nom* [126].) (root, tafne aa nom. [126].) Singtdar Plural. Singular. Plural. Nom. Lab6r, Labor-es. Nom. Mulier, Miilier-68. Gen. Labor-Is, L&bor-um. Gen. Miilier.is, Mfllier-um. Dat Labor-i, Labor-ibiis. Dat. MuUer-I, MiiUer-Ibiis. Ace. Labor-em, LabOr-es. Ace. MOller-era, Maiier-6s. Voc. Labor, LabOr-es. Voc. Miilier, Miilier-gs. Abl. Labor-e, LabOr-ibQs. Abl. MuUer-e, Mulier-Ibfts, 3; Patdr, a father. 4. Frater, a brother. (root,joaiy^m. 182.] NOUNS. — THIRD DECLENSION. 59 PAEAtlGMS. 1. Poema, n., a poem Singular. N. Poema, G. Poemat-is, D. Poem5t-i, A. Pofima, V. Poema, A. Poemat-c, L 2. N. G. D. A. V. A. Serm5, ?w., (root, sermon Singular. Serm5, Sermon-is, SennOn-i, Sermon-em, SermS, Sermon-e, a discourse. [131, 2].) Plural. Sermon-es. Sermon-um. Sermon-ibua. Sermon-es. Sermon-es. Sermon-Ibus. I : root, poemdt (131, 1). Plural. N. Poemat-a. G. Poemat-um. D. Poemat-ibu8, or is * A. Poemat-a. V. Poemat^a. A. Poemat-ibus, or Is.* 3. VirgS, /, a virgin. (root, virgin [181, 2. Rem. 2],) Singular. N. Virg», G. VirgIn-18, D. Virg!n-i, A. Virgin-em, V. Virg5, A. Virgln-e, Plural. Virgin-es. Virgin-um. Virgin-ibua. Virgin-es. Virgin-es. Virgin-Tbua 132. "Vocabulary. Acciplter, Iris, m. H6m6, inis, Optia, onis,/. Gratis, onis,/ Orator, Crls, PavC, onis, m. Poema, tis, n. Serm6, onis, m. Timid-US, a, um, VirgS, inis. hawk. man. choice oration. orator. peacock. poem. discourse timid. maiden, virgin ((^tiondl). (sermoti), (virgin). • Nouns in a ereneralW fnV« *u- _j.- . ■ , . and all. plural " "*' """ "" """""'^ "' "^'^^^ ^^ ^^''** '° *^« ^^ Illlj ^ FIRST LATIN BOOK. [133^ Jg^ 133. Mjcercises. (a) 1. Pater tu .,j ,>o,j,,i,j^a legebat. 2. Poeta sermS. nem tuum laudabil. 3. Timidae pueUae pavonem timent. 4. \ irgines Lomini viam monstrabunt 5. Bonus puer fratri optionem dabit. 6. Pu&i homi. nes timent. 7. Indocti sapientiarp ;^ .^ ' aestimabunt o. 1 uellae sorores suas amant. (^) 1;% brother is reading your discourse. 2. TJie boys vail kill the peacock. 3. They will kiU the beau- tiful peacocks. 4. Your mother is reading the poem. 5. 1 he girls are reading poems. 6. The doves fear the hawk. 7. The hawk will kill your dove 8. The hawks will kill the beautiful doves. 9. Mo- thers feel real sorrow. 10. The unlearned will lau^h at ' the orator. 11. The poet will hear the orationf 12 Ihe orator prizes ™dom highly.^ 13. The avaricious think Zz^^e 3 of wisdom. LESSON xxy. Nouns.— Third Declension.— Clciss in. 134. Class in. comprises nouns of the third declen- Bionm5.,m.,^5,a.(=,^or^5),w,y.,e,af6winz,*and a few m es. They form the root by dropping the nominative ending. 1) Nouns in hs, ms, ps, andy^, drop s: as, urhs, a city; root, urh ; hieim, winter; root, hiem. 2) Nouns in x (=cs or gs) drop the sinx: as, vox (as), a voice; root, vac, rex (gs), a king; root, reg. * Nouns iu ^ .ire of '^freek origin: most of tlK^se aj« in.l^/^ilnali- • ] io^v fmn tlie root by dropping i, wid a few by adding t (131. 1). " ' [133, 184 3ta serrao- pavonem mt. ii&i homi« itimabunt. >. 2. The the beau- He pcem. s fear the . 9. Mo laugh at' ion. 12. varicious i declen- 1 i* and 3mg the 3, urhs, a hum. nx: as, a king J linablo; s 1). 184.] NOUNS.— THIRD DECLENSION. 61 8) Nouns in is, ., and a few in .., drop those ^^^^^«'^^'/-^-,anenemj,. roo^ ;i,,^ -J.,acloud;root,n.5;^a>e,asea%oot TARADIGMS. 1. Urbs,/, aciti/. (root, Mr6 [134, IJ.) Singular. Plural. N. Urb-s, G. Urb-18, D. Urb-i, A. Urb-em, V. Urb.8, A. Urb-e, Urb-es. Urb-ium.* Urb-ibus. Urb-es. Urb-es. Urb-Ibus, ^•^x(os),/., a citadel. (root, arc [134, 2J.) Singular. Plural. N. Arx, G. Arc-Is, I>. Arc-T, A. Arc-em, V. Arx, A. Arc-e, Arc-es. Are-iilm* Arc-ibus. Arc-es. Arc-es. Arc-ibus. 5. Hostis, c, an enemy. (root, 7405^134,8].) Singular. Plural. N. Host-Ts, Host.es. G. Host-is, nf^3t-ium. D. Host-i, Host-ibus. A. Host-em, Host^es. V. Host-is, Host-es. A. Host-e, Host-ibus. 2. Mare, n., a sea. (root, mtfr [134, 8].) Singular. N. M5r-e, G. MSr-is, D. Mar-I, A. Mar-e, V. Mar-e, I A. Mar-i,f Plural. Mar-i5.f Mar-ium.^ Mar-ibus. Mar-ia. Mar-ia. Mar-ibus. 4. Rex (gs), m., a king. (root, r^^ [134, 2J.) Singular. N. Rex, G. Reg-is, D. Reg-r, A. Reg-em, V. Rex, A. Reg-e, Plural. Reg-es. Reg-um. Reg-ibus, Reg-es. Reg-es. Reg-ibus. 6. Nubes, /, a cloud. (root, nub [134, 3].) Singular. Plural. N. Nob-es, Nob-es. G. Nob-Is, h. Nob-i, A. Nob-em, V. Nub-es, I A. Nob-e, Nob-ium. Nub-ibus. Nob-es. Nub-es. Nub-ibfig. * Monosyllables in a or TTt ' — "^ — ' — ^ ^ feonitive plural See 141, s!' ^'''^ ^ ^ consonant, have turn in tho t S*e 127. 4 L'f 62 FIKST LATIN BOOK. [185, 18& iiinnHii citadel, tower. citizen (civil). Bhrub. flock, herd (gregarioui). enemy (hostile). judflfe (judicial). peace (pacijtc). criminal. to keep, observe (serve). to violate. \ 136. Exercises. mi 186. Vocabulary. Arx, arciB, /. Civis, !b, m. and / Friitex, Icis, m. Grez, £gis, m. Hostia, Is, m. and/. Jadex, icis, Pax, paciB, /. ReQs, I, Serv&r£, Viftlarfi, (a) 1. Caius leges violabit. 2. Eegina urbem con- iebat. 8. Pudri magnam urbia portam claudunt. 4. Pastores arcem condent. 5. Eeus judicis vocem timet. 6. Gives regem accusiibant. 7. Consiiles hostes vincebant. 8. Pastor gregem magni* aestimat. 9. Boni cives pacem magni aestimant 10. Filii patrem vindicabunt. 11. Servus fruticem in borto reperiebat. 12. Impii patriam auro vendunt. 13. Eel judJcis vocem timebunt. 14. Proditor patriam ^am» aestimat. 16. Proditores patriam parvi aestimabunt. 16. Agricola laborem finiebat. (J)) 1. The boys will not observe the law. 2. Good citizens observe the laws. 8. They will guard the city. 4. Soldiers will guard the cities. 5. They accuse the judge. 6. The criminals will accuse their judges. 7. The king is violating the law. 8. Slaves fear their masters. 9. Slaves fear the voices of their masters. 10. The king will conquer the enemy {pi). 11. The shepherd will guard his flock. 12. Shepherds guard their flocks. 18. The poet will 187.] NOUNS.— TmnD dsclension. ^ praise the judge. 14. They praise the judRes 16 Chnstians wm observe the laws of the e ty ^ 16 Ue zet^mlT'V^ 'r °f tl'^-'y- 17.Good e° zens wiU not violate the laws. 18. The boy is aceus- rhllr^XS'TTh''^'"'^""- ^^- ^^^ virtue. 22. They pnze money %A?y.i LESSON XXVI. Noum.— Third Declensim.— Class IV m ^. These form the root by ehanging , into r, t, 1) Nouns in as, &, „., rs, and most of those ine, Sen^aUy ohar^ge s into t: as, ^a«,, piet^: root, p^etat.■ mom, a mountain^ root, m J/- aS^e.. a fir-tree; root, aUet: nlk, a soS root,mza. (Sees™. 2, below) ' LT'^''^ ?'''': ^°°*'»--^'J»«-<^*,apriest: roo^ Mcer&i.- ,,»Wj«,, ^rtue ; root L« .«.,aW;root„.„.V..^;^,,^,~ Vr I U FIRST LATIN BOOK. PARADIGMS. 1138. 1. Ci vitas, /, a state. (root, clvXtai [ni, 1].) Singviar. Plural. N. Civltas, Civitat-es. G. Civitat-18, Civitat-um. D. Civitat-i, Civitat-ibus. A. Civitat-em, Civltat-fis. V. Civitas, Civitat-es. A. Civitat-e, CivitaWbus. 3. Miles, c, a soldier. (root, mint [13*7, 1, Rem. 2].) Singular. Plural. 2. Ars, /, art. (root, art [ISY, 1].) Singular. N. Ars, G. Art-is, D. Art-I, A. Art-em, V. Ars, A. Art-e, Plural. Art-es. Art-ium. Art-ibus. Art-68. Art-68. Art-lbus. N. Miles, G. Millt^is, D. Milit-I, A. Milit-em, V. Miles, A. Mllit-e, MllIt-68. Millt-um. MlllWbus. Milil^es. Mllit-es. Mllit-ibus. 4. Corpus, n.j a body. (root, corpdr [137, 2].) Singular. N. Corpus, G. Corpor-is, D. Corp5r-l, A. Corpus, V. Corpus, A. Corp6r-e, Plural. Corpor-a. Corp6r-um. Corpor-ibus. Corp6r-a. Corp6r-a. Corpor-ibuB. 138. The Latin, like every other language, has certain forms of expression peculiar to itself, called Tdimas:'^ e. g., Aliquidf temporis, MuUumf boni, Quantum f voluptatls, Nihil stabilitatls, something of time (Lat. Idiom). (Eng. Idiom). (Lat. Idiom). (Eng. Id'unn). ( some time { much of good ( much good { how much of pleasure (Lat. Idiom). I how much pleasure (Eng. Idiom). t nothing t)f stability (Lat. Idiom). ( no stability (Eng. Idiom). Rem. — These (f) are neuter adjectives used as nouns ; they govern the genitive by the rule already given (65). * These should be carefully compared with the corresponding English — ^ — ^ „... j,,.^,.;..„, .^.g ^.j ^ujv/Ti uclwecii tuc jjuiiu iuiu Jiu^ liflh is insei-ted m this volume for the benefit of the learner See p. 276. 130, 140.] NOUNS.— THIRD DECLENSIOJS. 65 139. Vocabulary. Aliquld, Amittere, Avarltia, ae, Ci vitas, atis,/ Corpus, oris, n. Elephas, antis, m. FigQra, ae, Habere, Improbus, a, Qm, Multum (neut. adj.), Multum boni, Multum temporis, Nihil (indec), Perdere, Quantum (neut. adj.), Sacerdos, otls, m. and/ Stabilltas, atls,/ Tempus, oris, n. Voluptas, atis,/. somethinsr. to lose, avarice, state. body elephant figure. to have. bad, wicked. much. much good. much time. nothing. to waste how much ? priest, priestess. firmness, stability time. pleasure (corporal), (corporeal). (perdition) (stdbilily). (voluptuous) 140. Exercises. (a)^ i. Avaritia 7iiJiU habet voluntatis.* 2. Multum fempcm perdebat. 3. Eigura rdhU habet stahiimtis. 4. Improbi leges civitatis violabunt. 5. Servus ele- pliantis corpus pudro monstrabat. 6. Improbi virtutem parvi* aestimant. 7. Milites vioubunt. 9. Discipuli multum temporis perdunt. 10 indocti multum voluntatis amittunt. © 1. The boy will waste much time.* 2. Thev will ^. The soldiers are violatinir the ln,ws of fl^e ^^t-e T THe king will punish the soldiers. ' ' ' ^' ilii »l " 66 FIIIST LATIN BOOK. [141, 142. 6. Tlio priests were praising the queen. 7. The good queen will praise the priests. 8. Tlie soldiers will fear the enemy. 9. The good value wisdom highly.^ 10. He will laugh at' the unlearned. 11. He is losing much time, 12. The unlearned lose much ;pUamre. LESSON XXYH. Nouns,— Third Dechmixm, contvnued.-^Qenitives in max. — Gender, 141. It has already been mentioned (128, Eem.) that sorae naans of the third declension have the genitive plu3-al in lum instead of um. These are, 1) Reuters m c, al, and ar: as, mare, Tmrimn; dmmdlj animalium. 2) .^ouns in is and es of Class HI. : as, hostis, hostiUm; nuhes, nuhium. 8) All monosyllables in 5 or a; preceded by a consonant: as, urhs, urhium; arx, arcium. 4) Nouns in tw and rs (though in these Um is sometimes used): as, diens, dientium ; cohors, cohortium. Rem.— The use of turn in words not included in the above classes must be learned from obseryatioa 142. The gender of nouns of the third declension, when not determined by their signification (40, 44),' may generally be ascertained from their endings, by the following EULES FOB GRAMS' ATICAL GENDER. 1) Masculines.—Most nouns in er, or, os es, in- ~?asing m the genitive, and o, except do, go, 143, 144.] *rOUNS.— LENDER. «7 and lb, are mascuHne; e.g., aer, air; honor, honor; fds, a flower; pts (gen. p^dis), a foot; seTTY)^^ a discourse. 2) Femini7i€s.—-hlLost nouns in e/o, ^. atower; lavs praise; hieim, winter; ^«r,alaw; w^iies feen' nubis), a cloud. 3) Neuters^UoBi nouns in a, e, z] y, c, ?, n, t, ar, ur, and t^, are neuter; e. g., ^.iare, a sea; ^oema, a poem ; Idc, milk ; amma7, an animal : Jlumen, a river; ca^t, a head, &c. For exceptions, see Tahle of Genders (579). 143. Vocabulary Amicus, I,*- Animus, i, Carpere, Flos, Oris, Ignavus, fi, urn, MagnltodS, Inis, friend mind, soul. to gather, to pluck. flower indolent, cowardly. greatness, size 144. Mcercises. (amicable) ifioral). (magnitudes CLnstiani leges bonas non violabunt 8 Pn^rr!,, 7, -ut';';r^ivTp:erl.?^"^ ^°r"™ *• -^^^^^ patris vocem audit. 8. lilt if Hi IB '■ \ mi 68 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [145. ?ueri patrum voces audient. 9. Lupus haedum dila- niabat. 10. ITaedi lupos timent. (b) 1. The boys are gathering flowers. 2. He will pluck the beautiful flower. 3. The dog will fear tho lion. 4. Dogs fear lions. 5. The girl will waste much time.* 6. Your fat er will lose much time. 7. The in- dolent lose much pleasure, 8. The priests are praising the king. 9. The queen will not violate the laws. 10. The king's son was violating the laws of the state. 11. My friend will not disregard my sorrow. 12. Your friends will not disregard your sorrow LESSON xxvin. Nouns.— Third Declension.— Formation of Cases from each other. 146. 1) In any noun of the third declension, all the cases, except the nominative and vocative singular (and the accusative sing, in neuters), can be readily formed fropi each other, by a simple change of the endings : thus, the accu- sati\ e sing, honorem gives (by a change of end- ing) the da^.. Iwndnj or the dat and abl. plur. hZmnbils, or any other case which may be desired. 2) The nominative and vocative singular (and ace. sing, in neuters) can generally bo formed from any other case, in some one cf the following ways ; 146, 147.1 FORMATION OF CASES. ^9 a) By dropping the ending of the given case: as. hojwrem* Norn, honor.f Rkm. 1.— This applies to many nouns whose root ends ml,n, or r and to a few with the root in it. Rkk. 2.-7 is changed before t into u, and before n into S; and g ui inserted before r when preceded by < or 6 (126, 1); e. g Gen. eSpm- root, cSpU; Nom. cSpUt. Qen. JlUmtnXs; root, AumXn; ^om. Jlumhi. GexLpatrU; root, patr;l^oia.pSth'. h) By changing the ending of the given case into ^, c^, w, (or for neuters into) e: as, urhis, Norn, urls ; miOem, JNom. niihes, &c. Hem. L— This appHes to most nouns of this declensioa RK3t 2.-7; dor r, at the end of the root, is dropped before s, and i 18 changed mto e; cs or g, wiU of course be written x; e. ^ />^.^a^«». Norn, p^-g^a. (< dropped before *); mmem, Norn, mm {t dropped before ,, and ? changed into g); rSgem, Norn, rear (rega — rex). c) By changing the ending of the given case, to- gether with er or or, as the last syllable of the root, into us: as, generis, Norn. gmus. REM.~This applies only to a few of tbDse words whose root ends in 6T or Sr, 146. The predicate of a proposition may be modified by a noun denoting the manner or cause of its action or the means or instrument employed ; e. g. ' Iram meam ddnd placabit. {A7iger TnywUh a gift he will appease) He will appease my anger with a gift. U7. EuLE OF Synta:^.. ^The cause or manner of an wd* '^' '^'' '*"^' ^ "'"^ ^'''' ^'^""^^ ^^ oth^iT^^^^^^^^i^^;;^^ t The noT.1. and t,oo., it will be remembered, ^^ the same in form. 70 111! FIRST LATIN BOOK. [148, 149. action, and the means or instrument employed, are ex- pressed by the ablative. RiM.— la the above example, ddnS expresses the means omp^-vred and is accordingly in the ablative. ' 148. YOOABULARY. Altus, &, Qm, C&t6n&, ae, Clngere, Complfire, Cunctus, a, um, Doniim, I, FlQmen, inis, Gladiils, r, Illustrare, Tra, ae, Lux, iQcis, Mulier, eris, Placate, high, lofty chain. to surround. to fill all (as a whole) gift river. sword. to illumine to illuminate anger light woman, to appease 149. Exercises, \ (altitude). 'cnmplement), (cbnation). (illustrate) (ire). (irascible), (Iticid). (placable). (a) 1. Miles regem gladio occidebat. 2. Regem catena ymciebat. 3. Sol urbem magnam sua luce illustrat. 4. Ii-am dono placant. 5. Gives regis iram donis placa- bunt. 6. Flumen urbem cingit. 7. Mulier bona epistolas scribit. 8. Agric51a urbia portas claudet. 9. Poetaj-um filiae cantant. "^0 Pul- cbrae pastorum filiae saltabunt. 11. Caii animun: donis placabunt. (6) 1. The soldiers will bind the king with chains. £. lUe river will surround the beautiful city. 3 The boy surrounds his head with a garland. 4. He will ^ — „^„., ,,^ =^tci 5 nuau Willi garlands. 6. Ho will 160, 151.] ADJECTIVES.— rniED DECLENSION. 7J give a beautiful garland to his sister. 6. They will give beautiful garlands to tbeir brothers. 7. They were bmlding a wall. 8. They will sur- round the city with a high wall. 9. The sun illumines all (things) with its light. 10. The sun fiUs aU (things) with its light. 11. The blind do not see the sun. 12. The bUnd do not see the light of the sun. LESSON XXIX. Adjectives.-— Third Declension. 150. Adjectives of the third declension may be divided into three classes, viz : 1) Those which have three different forms in the nominative singular (one for each gender). 2) Those which have two (the masc. and fern, being the same). 3) Those which have but one (the same for aU genders). ^ 151. Adjectives of the third declension are declined m their several genders like nouns of the same declen^ ^^^mrfer andmc?tV.y. It must, however, be observed, - 1) That those which have only one form in the nommative singular have the abl. sing, in e or t, and the rest, with the exception of compara- tives, in I only. 2) That all except comparatives have, in the plural, ihQ mm., ace., and voo. neuter in id. and the genitive in ium. 9S FIRST LATIN BOOK. CLASS I. — THREE TERMINATIONS. [152, 16a 152. Adjectives of the first class have in the nomi. native singular the masculine in er, the feminine in w, a ad the neuter in e. m I iF Vrv. PARADIGM. Ac§r, sharp. SmcXTLAR. Maac. Fern. ^ent. N. Acer, acr-is, acr-e. G. Acr-is, acr-is, acr-i8. D. Acr-I, ' acr-T, acr-i. A. Acr-Sm, acr-em, acr-e. V. Acer, acr-is, acr-e. A. Acr-I, acr-r, PLURAL. acr-i. N. Acr-es, acr-es. acr-ia. G. Acr-ium, acr-ium, acr4um. D. Acr-ibu3, acr-ibus, acr-ibus. A. Acr-es, acr-es, acr-i§ V. Acr-es, acr-6s, acr-ia. A. Acr-ibus, acr-ibus. acr-ibus. CLASS II. — TWO TERMINATIONS. 153. Adjectives of the second class have both the masculine and feminine in w, and the neuter in e ex- cept comparatives* which have the masculine ' and fuminine in lor, and the neuter in ius. * The use of comparatives will be illustrated in connection with tho oomparifion of adjectives. 164.] ADJECTIVES.— THIfiD DECLENSION. 73 PARADIGMS. inme in w. 1. SINOULAK. Maac. and Fern. Neut. N. Trist-iB, G. Trist.18, D. Trist-i, A. Trist-em, V. Trist-is, A. Trist-I, trist-e. trist-is. trist-l. trist-e. trist-e. trist-I. Tristis, sad. PLURAL. Mate. andFem. Keut, N. Trist^ea, G. Trist-iura, D. Trist-lbus, A. Trist-es, V. Trist-68, A. Trist-ibus, trist-ia. trist-ium. trist-lbus. trist-ia. trist-ia. trist-lbus. tristiQs, tristior-Is. tristior-i. tristius. tristius. 2. Tristior {comparative)^ mcrte sad. PLURAL. Masc. andFem. Kent. N. Tristior-6s, tristior-a. G. Tristior-um, tristior-um. D. Tristior-ibus, tristior-lbus. A. Tristior-es, tristior-a. V. Tristior-€8, tristior-a. A. Tristior-ibus, tristior-ibus. SINGULAR. Maac. andFem. Neut. N. Tristior, G. Tristior-is, D. Tristior-i, A. Tristior-ein, V. Tristior, A. Tristior-e (i), triatior-e (l). CLASS III. — ONE TERMINATION. 154. AU Other adjectives of this declension have mly one form in the nominative singular for all gendere. PARADIGMS. SINGULAR. MoK. and Fern, Xeut. 1. Felix, happy. N. Felix, G. Felic-18, D. Felic-I, A. Felic-em, V. Felix, A. FeJiC-e (r), felix. fellc-is. fellci. felix. felLv. fellc-e (i). PLURAL. Masc. andFem. Mut. N. Felloes, G. Felic-ium, D. Felrc-ibus, A. Fellc-es, V. Fellc-es, A. Felic-ibus, felic-ia. felic-ium. fellc-ibus. felic-ia. felic-l5. felic-ibua ""■■'- i I ! i!l u FIRST LATIN BOOK. PAKADiGMS, — continued. [155, 16ft SINGULAR Mate, and Fern. Mut N. PrQdens, prQdena G. Prodent-is, prodent-is. D. PrQdenUi, prodent-i. A. Prodent-em, prodens. V. PrQdens, prQdens. A. Prodent-e (i), prod. i<^e(r). 2. F rudensj jjmdent. PLURAL. Maac. and Fern, Ne%ii. N. PrQdent-es, prodent-iS. G. Prfldent-ium, prodent-ium. D. PrQdent-ibus, prodent-ibiig. A. PrQdent-es, prndenWa. V. PrQdent-es, prodent-ia. A. PrQdent-lbus, prQdent-ibus. 155. YOCABULARY. Acer, acris, acre, sharp, severe Fidells, e» Fortls, e, Gloria, ae, Maculare, Maximi, Maximi aestlmare, to prize'^very highly.^ Pausanlas, ae, Pausanias, trusty, faithful brave glory. to blemish, to stain at a very high (price), very highly. (acrid). ifidelUy). (fortiiude). (maculate) PrQdens, entls, Turpis, e, Sapions, entis, Splendens, entls, (turpitude) (splendid). a distinguished Spartan general. prudent, cautious, base, disgraceful wise, shining 156. JEocercises. (a) 1. Pater meus fidelem servum vindicabat. 2. Fideles servi dominos suos vindicabunt. 3. Sol splen- dens^cuncta sua luce iUustrabat. 4. Sapientes virttitem maximi^ aestimant. 5. Sapiens leges acres non violabit. 6. Christiani virtutem laudant. 7. Boni virtutem wo^m aestimabant. 8. Pausanias gloriam turpi morte maculabat. 9. Pausa- nias magnam belli gloriam turpi morte maculabat © 1. The brave soldier will fialif. q an.^ i..^^^ king will conquer the enemy {pi). 8. The brave will 167, 168 ] ADJECTfVES. 70! conquer tLe cowardly. 4. Wise (men) will not stain their glory by a base death. 6. The good prize the laws of the state very highly.'^ 6. Kind masters do not punish faithful slaves. 7. A prudent (man) will not violate the laws of his country. 8. The prudent do not violate severe laws. LESSON XXX. Adjectives, continued.— Noum.— Fourth Declension. 157. Adjectives are either of the first and second declension, or of the third only : those of the first and sec- ond declension are declined in the masculine and neuter like nouns of the second declension, and in the feminine like nouns of the first; those of the third declension are declined throughout like nouns of the third. (See Lesson XXTTT.) 158. Endings of adjectives of the first and second declension. BIKGTQi.AR. PLUEAI« Afetot have Sing, tkua: Masc. Fern. Neut Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Fern. Neut. 2.* 1. 2. 2. 1. 2L M. G. D. us, er,f a, um, I. ae, a. US, er, a, um. h ae, I. Orum, arum, orum. lus, lus, lus. o, ae, 0. is. Is, Is. I, I, I. A. um, am, um. OS, as, a. um, am, um. V. e, er,f a, um. i> ae, a. e,er, a. um. A. o, a, o. is, Is, Is. 0, a, o. ♦ ITie declensions of the diflferent genders are here indicated by numo- mist t In adjectives in er, the masc. nom. sing, is gcneraUy the root(S is ■ometimes dropped): er, therefore, is not properly a case-ending; it i, --J ,R^ i«xiiiimuuu ui lae nom. ana voe. ting., with* out regard to the root (107). t See list, 113, IlKst IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-S) / ^ ^^ <" 1.0 I.I ^1^ ^ £ us 112.0 1.8 1.25 1 1.4 1.6 ^ 6" ► V] <^ /a A •c^ ^.fj^ ^4 ^^/ i^ ^ ^» ^^^ '/ Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREE1 WEBSTER, NY. 14580 (716) 872-4503 0" ,<^ f ii ill! 76 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [159 — 16& 169. Endings of adjectives of the Third Declensioii. THSEE TEEIL TWO TEEM. CUMFA&ATIVES.. ONSTEEH. M. R N. M.JtF. N. M.ikF. K, M.ilF. K N. er,* is, e. IS, e. 6r,t fis. various. G. 18, 18, IS. 18, 18, orf-is. Or-is. is. D. h I, I. I, I. or-l, or-l. I. A. em, em. e. em, e. Or-em, tis. em.J V. er,* 18, e. IS, e. or. us. like nom. A. I. I, I. or-e (or-l) , or-e (or-l). e(l). N. es, 68, ia. gs, ia. or-es, or-a. es, ia. G. ium, ium. ium. ium, ium. or-um. Or-um. ium, ium. D. ibus, ibus. ibus. ibus, ibus. Or-ibus, or-ibus. ibus, ibus. A. es, es. ia. es, ia. or-es, or-a. es, ia. V. es, es. ia. es,' ia. or-es, Or-a. es, ia. A. Ibus, ibus, Ibus. ibus, ibus. or-ibus. Or-ibus. ibr'S, ibus. FOURTH DECLENSION. 160. Nouns of the Fourth Declension have the geni- tive singular in us^ and the nominative in us and u. 161. In this declension, nouns in Us (with a few ex- ceptions) are masculine^ and those in u are neuter. 162. The root is found by dropping the nominatm ending: as, fructus, fruit; root, fruct: comu^ a horn; root, corn. 163. Nouns in us (of the fourth declension) are de- clined with the following CASE-ENDINGS. Ifom. Gen. Dot. Aceua. Voe. AM. Sing us, OS, ul, um, us, Q. Plur. OS, uflm, ibiis(ubus5)s Qs, fls, ibus (fibusj). * The remark on this ending, in. adjectives of the first and second de- clension, is also applicable here (See 168, Rem. 2.) f J. lie dr here gi-en in counectioa with the case-endings belongs to the root ; in the nom., ace, and voc. of the neut. sing., it is changed into ua. t Neut like nom. § This ending is used only in a fcTV words 164, 165.] NOUNS. — ^FOURTH DECLENSION. 77 164. Neuters in u^ though formerly considered inde- clinable in the singular, are found to have the genitive in W5, and are declined with the following NEUTER CASE-ENDINGS. Norn. Gen. Sing. Q 08, Plnr. ua, uum, Dat. Acctis. Voe, Abl. a, 0, 0, a. ibua (ilbus*), ua, ua, ibus (iibus*). PARADIGMS. 1. Fructiis, m.,/r^6^V. 2. Comu, n.y a Twm. (root, fruct.) (root, com^ Singular. Plural. Bingvlar. Plural. N. Fruct-u8, Fruct-tls. N. Com-tJ, Ccrn-ua. G. Fruct-fls, Fruct-uum. G. Com-fls, Com-uiim. D. Fruct-ul, FrucWbus. D. Com-fl, Com-ibua. A. Fruct-um, Fruct-Qs. A. Com-a, Com-ua. V. Fruct-us, Fruct-Qs. V. Com-0, Com-ua. A. Fruct-Q. Fruct-ibus. A. Com-0, Com-ibu8. 165. "Vocabulary. Curriis, 08, chariot. Dux, duels, m. andf. leader, guide Et, Excruciare, Exercitus, Os, Inndcens, entts, Luctus, OS, Manus, Os,/. Metus, Os, Neacire, Sinus, Os, (duke), (fixcruciate). Sulla, ae. and. to torture army. innocent. grief, sadness. hand fear. not to know, to be ignorant of. bosom (sinuout). Sulla, a marHs name. (manacle) • This ending ia used only in a few worda. 78 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [166—168. 166. Mcercises. (a) 1. Sinus metum nescit. 2. Luctus animum ex- cruciat. 3. Rex hostiuin (141, 2) currus videt. 4. Hostes regis curnun audient. 5. Duces exercitui viam monstrabunt. 6. Puella epistolam sua manu scribit. 7. Caius epistolas sua manu scribebat. 8. Servi Sul- lae domum evertebant. 9. Servus dommi mortem vindicabit. 10. Pastoris filius mortem non timet. 11. Luctus et metus animum excruciant (612, Rem.). (b) 1. The innocent (man) knows not fear. 2. The innocent know not fear. 3. The bosom of the inno- cent knows not fear. 4. The boy's mother will write the letter with her own hand. 6. The father is wiiting the letters with his own hand. 6. The slave will show the beautiful chariot to his master. 7. The father will avenge the death of his son. 8. Fear tortures the cowardly. 9. Fear does not torture the brave. 10. The cowardly fear death. 11. Brave soldiers do not fear the enemy. I n LESSON XXXL Muns. — Fifth Declension. ^ 167. Nouns of the Ftfih Declension have the genitive singular in et* and the nominative in es. 168. Nouns of this declension are feminine, except dies, a day, masculine and feminine in the singular, « In the ending of the gea and dat. sing, e is long, except in $p^ (wi-cro it is shoTi), jidei, and rei (where it is common). 169 — 171.] NOUNS. — FIFTH DECLENSION. 79 and masculine only in the plural ; and mendieSf mid- day, masculine. Bbm. — The fifth declension comprises only a few words, and of these few, only two, — diss, a day, and rSs, a thing, are complete in the plural 169. The root is formed by dropping the nomina- tive ending; as, dies, a day; root, di, 170. Nouns of this declension are declined with the following CASE-ENDINGS. Nom. Gen. Bat. Aceua. Voc. AU. Sing. es, 61,* el* em, es, e. Plur. es, erum, ebus, es. es, ebt^s. PARADIGMS. Ees,/, a thing. Dies, m. and/., a day. (root. r) (root, di.) Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. N. R-es, R.es. N. Di-es, Di-68. G. R-Sl, R-erum. G. Di-ei, Di-erum. D. lUl, R-ebus. D. Di-ei, Di-gbus. A. R-em, R-es. A. Di-em, Di-fis. V. R-es, R-es. V. Di-es, Di-68. A. R-e, R-ebus. A. Di-e, Di-ebiis. 171. YOCABULART. Acies, el, line of battle. Aciem instruere, to draw up an army in order of battle. Copiae,t arum, forces (copiom). Dies, €T, day. • See note on page T^. I Oftpiaft is nf the first declension, plural ; the singular is not used with this significatioa 80 EdQcere, Emerc, Equitatus, Qs, Fides, 6i, Instruere, Omnls, e, Proximus, a, um, RedQcere, Servare, Spes, el, FIRST LATIN BOOK. to lead forth to purchase. cavalry. faith, one's word to arrange, to array all, every. nearest, Lext to lead back to keep, to observe hope. 172. Exercises. [172 (educe). (JidelUy). (instruct). (proximate) (reduce). (serve). 1 ! (a) 1. Christianus fidem suam servat. 2. Boni fidem suam non violant. 3. Dies veniet. 4. Proximo die (88) Caesar copids suas reducebat. 5. Proximo die Caesar aciem instruebat. 6. Caesar equitatum omnem educobat. 7. Puellam regis currum videbat. 8. Hostium (141, 2) copiaa videbunt. 9. Tullia puellis viam monstrabit. 10. TuUia epistolam sua manu scribit. (h) 1. The king will keep his word. 2. The queen will not break her word. 3. All (men) prize hope very highly.^ 4. They do not purchase hope with gold. 5. The wise will not sell hope for gold (122). 6. He prizes his cavalry very highly. 7. The king tliinks highly of his whole army. 8. The soldiers will observe the laws. 9. The citizens will observe all the laws of the state. 10. The wise value true greatness of mind very highly. 11. The avaricious value money very highly. 173, 174.] NOUNS.— FIVE DECLENSIONS. 81 LESSON XXXII. Nouns. — Five Declensions. — Oreeh Nouns.- — Gender, 173. Terminations of Substantives. BINQULAR. Dee.L Dec.ll Dec. Ill Dee. IV. Dec.y. F. M. N. M.^F. N. M. If. P. N. a. u8,er,ir. iim. various. Qf. Q. €8. G. ae. I. Is. 08. «.♦ D. ae. 0. I. Ul. 0. ei.* A. am. um. em (im). like nom. um. ft. gm. V. a. e, er,1r. um. like nom. us. n. €8. A. a. 0. e (I). Q. e. rLUBAI.. N. ae. I. a. eg, a, or ia. Qs. ua. es. G. arum. orum. um (ium). uum. erum. D. Is. IS. ibus. ibus (iibus). ebua. A. 'dS. OS. a. es. a, or ia. Oa. ua. gs. V. ae. I. &. 68. a, or ia. OS. ua. 68. A. 18. IS. ibiis. ibus (SWis). ebu8. Keji. — The above table presents the endings of all nouns in the Latin language, except a few derived from the Greek. The only nomi- native endings not already noticed, are e, as, and ea, in the first declension, and as and on in the second. 174. The following are specimens of the declension of Greek nouns. * See U1, Rkm. FIRST LATIN BOOK. [174 l;i DECLENSION 1. 1. Aeneas (c marCs name). N. Aene-as, G. Aene-ae, D. Aene-ae, A. Aene-am (an), V. Aene-a, A. Aene-a. 2. Anchises (a man's name). N. Anchls-es, 6. Anchl»-ae, D. Anchls-ae, A. Anchls-gn, V. Anchis-fi (a), A. Anchi8-6 (a). 3. Epitome, an abridgment. Singular. Plural. N. Epit6m-6, Epit6m.ae. G. Epitom-es, Eplt6m-arum. D. Epltonvae, EpitSm-ls. A. Epit6m-6n, Epitom-aa. V. Epitom-e, Epitom-ae. A. Epit6m-6, Eplt6m-I8. DECLENSION IL 1. Uion, n. {name of a city). N. Ili-on, G. ni-i, D. Ei-o, A. Ili-on, V. Ili-on, A. Ili-o. 2. Delos, / (name of an island). N. Del-OS, G. Del-i, D. Del-o, A. Del-on, y. Del-e, A. Del-0. DECLENSION IIL 1. Pericles (a man's name). N. Pericl-es, G. Pericl-is, D. Perfcl-I, A. Per!cl-em (ea), V. Pericl-es (e), A. Perfcl-e. 2. Heros, a hero. Singular. Plural. N. Hero-8, Hfiro-es. G. Hero-is, Hero-um. D. Hero-i, Hero-ibus. A. Hero-em (&), Hero-es (as). V. Here-s, Her6-es. A. Her5-e, HerO-ibus. 176. 176.] GENDER. 83 176, Table of Genders of Nouns as detennmed by Nom. Ending. ILASOUUNE. FKIONINK. NKURK. Dec. I. as and €9. ^ and e. Dec. II. er, ir, ua Cand ob*). um (and on*). Dec. III. er, or, 09, es, in- creasing in gen. and 0, except do, go, and io. do,go,io,a9,ifl,y9, aus, s impure,f X and es not in- creasing in gen. a, e, i, y, c, 1, n, t, ar, ur, and U9 Dec. IV. us. Q. Dec. V. 68. (For exceptions see Table of Genders [579]). 176. YOCABULARY. Accipere4 Achill6g,5 'S» Aeneas, ae, Anchlgfis, ae, Ascaniu9, T, CarthagS, inis, to receive, to accept Achille9, a Grecian Tiero. Aeneas, a Trojan "prince. Anchises, the father of Aeneas. Ascaniua, the son of Aeneas. Carthage, a city in the northern part of Africa. ♦ The inclosed endings belong to Greek nouns, many of which, being proper names (of men and women), have natural gender. f Preceded by a consonant. X AcdpSrS forms its imperfect and future tenses like verbs of the fourth conjugation. (See 270, 2*71.) & Achillj^a. bftTTlCP a. flvac\T nniin \a Aac\ir>'^r\ VAra Pninrtlna ^1'roHition, foi it iM Uuit of Avlticli tho })i'0(liaito dljjicile eat (ia (liiUciilt) in alllmiod It ia ill iliti noiniuntivo ciiso, Riul Hiibjoct of ilio verb eat, luul tliti luljoctivo iliJ'\cXl(i iigroca >vitl» it 185. Wl'on tlio noun in the predicate after csai5 doca not denote tho same person or thing as tho subject, it is put in the gmitive; o. g., Clu'istiiinl est nCmtnLJm violiIi'cJ. (0/a Christian it is nobody to wrong.) It is the duty (oy part) of a Christian to wrong nobody. Ukm. 1. — In thia oxaui]>lo tJ»o subjoct is n^m\iCt»H viSldrii, ami tlio pro- ilicftto, Vhriatlanl est. Ukm. 2. — Coiabuiujg jirticloa 180 ami 186 "we liavo tlio following ISO. EuLK OF Syntax. — A noun in tho predicate, afler tho verb esse, is put, 1) In tho same case as the subject when it de- notes the san\o person or thing ; e. g., CiC(5r5 (5rat consul, Cicero ivas coyisul. 2) In the genitive when it denotes a different per- son or thing ; c. g.. Christian! est neminCra vi(3- hIrC>, it is the duty of a Christian to wrong nobody, 187. In reniicring into English, when a genitive fol- lows any part of the verb ess<5 (as est, erdt, ent, &c.), such a substantive as duty, part, mark, business, &c.. must be supplied. JCiiglish Lliom. Latin Tdiwn. It is tho part u u ¥ duty buainosa character j > of n wise num. It is of a wise man. 188, 189.J ruEDiCATE with esse. 89 188. Vocabulary. J)ilTTc1lTH, V, difTicult. Errarc, to err. Fi'iclIlH, (3, easy Fideiii violare, to break one's word. llnmanuH, a, uni, human, natural to man. Magnum I'Ht, it ih a great thing. I'eccare, to win, to do wrong. TurplH, (•, haHo, diHgracefu! to offend against, to wrong, to break a hiw, one's word, &c {facility). Violare, (turpUtuk). > (violate). 189. Exercises. {a) 1. JTumdnum" est pcccarc. 2. Ilumanum est erriirc. 3. Tar2ie est fidcm suam violure. 4. Patris' est liliurn suiim docGrc. 5. Bcgis est rcgnaro. (). Matris est filias suas docere. 7. Servi est viara iiionstrarc. 8. Turpe est pootae domum evertcrc. 9. Matrcs lilias laudant. 10. Boni est fidem servare. 11. Impii est lidem violare. Rem. 1. — In English, when an infinitive mood is the subject of a pro- |K)8ition, tlie pronoim it is used before the verb is; hence, in translating sudi sentences into Latin, this pronoun it, which repre- sents, as it were, the coming infinitive or clause, must be omitted. R^ar. 2. — After it is, such a substantive as part, duty, business, mark must be omitted in translating into Latin. (b) 1. It is a great (thing) not to fear death." 2. It is easy to err. 3. It is (the duty)' of a Christian to keep (his) word. 4. It is (the part) of a wise (man) to keep the laws, 5. It is disgraceful to neglect a non. 6. It is natural- to-man to prize money veri/ highly. 7. It is the mark of an unlearned man to think little of wisdom. 8. It is the slave's husiness to shut the gates of the citv, 9. It is difficult to shut the gates of the city. 10. A 90 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [190—192. good citizen will observe the laws of his country. 11. It is the part^ of a good citizen to observe the laws of his country. LESSON XXXV. Verbs. — Tenses for Completed Action.— First, Second^ and Fourth Conjugations. 190. The tenses which we have thus far used, viz., the present^ imperfect^ and future^ represent the action of the verb as continuing (11), i. e., as not ccmipleted. There are also thtee tenses for completed action, viz. : 1) The Perfect, which represents the action as completed in present time, i. e., as just com- pleted ; e. g., dmdvit, he has loved. 2) The Pluperfect, which represents the action aa completed in past time ; as, dmdverdt, he had loved. 3) The Future Perfect, which represents the action as completed in future time ; as amdveritj he will have loved. 191. The tenses for completed acjtion are not formed from the same root as those for action not completed, but from another called the second root. This is formed in various ways. 192. In the first, second, and fourth conjugations, the second root is formed by adding av, u* and w, re- spectively, to the rootf of the verb ; e. g. : * A very few verbs of the second conjugation add ev, ■which may be regarded aa the full form for which m is a contraction (the e being dxx)}*- ped, and v changed to «), f Thia we will now call the 1st root, to distinguish it from the 2d. 193, 194.] VERBS. — CONJUGATIONS. 91 'irst Hoot. 6econd Root. am, simdv. mon. monw. aud, audlv. Conj. I. Amare, Conj. II. Monere, Conj. TV. Audire, 193. In verbs of all tlie conjugations, tlie third per- sons singular of tlie tenses for completed action are formed by adding to tbe second root the following endings: Perfttt. Pluperfect. Future PerfeeL it, erat, €rit. PARADIGMS. FIRST CONJUGATION. Amare, to love: 1st root, dm; 2d root, dmav. Perfect. Amav-it, he, she, or it has loved {w loved).* Pluperf. Amav-grat, « « « had loved. Fut. Perf. Amav-erit, « " « will have loved. SECOND CONJUGATION. Monere, to advise: 1st root, 772o?i ; 2d root, 7w5nw. Perfect. M6nu-it, he, she, or it has advised {or advised).* Pluperf. Monu-erat, " " " had advised. Fut. Perf. Monu-erlt, « « « shall have advised. FOURTH CONJUGATION. Audire, to hear: 1st root, aud; 2d root, audlv. Perfect. Audlv-it, he, she, or it has heard (or heard).* Pluperf. Audlv-erat, " « « had heard. Fut. Perf. Audlv-erit, « « « shall have heard. 194. In any regular verb, the third persons plural^ in the tenses for completed action, are formed by simply ♦ The perfect in Latin corresponds sometimes to oiu: perfect indefi- \*tte. and somntim^n t<^ myr ne»-ea«* ^p-c^'f^ l-^rt.<>tnr.\ -.^^x, i,„_-\ . timauW may be translated either he has loved, or he loved. 1 92 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [195, 196. inserting 7i before t in the ending of tlie third person singular (35), except in the perfect, where it must be changed into erunt; e. g., Perfect. Pluperfect. Met. Perfect. Coni I ■! ^^°^' -^^^^"^^j amav-erat, amav-erit. ' ( Plur. AmsiY-eruntj amav-eraw/J, amav-erin^. Coni II i ^^^^* ^^^^"^*» monu-drat, monu-Srit. ' ( Plur. Momi-eruntj monu-^imtf monu-drin^ Coni lY i ^^^^* -^^^^V"i*> audiv-erat, audlv-erit. ' I Plur. Audlv-eruntj audlv-^an^, audiv-eri?2;. 195. YOCABULARY. Aestimare, av,* < to estimate, to value. Arare, av, Audire, Iv, Dilaniare, av, jQrare, av, Laudare, av, Monstrare, av, Placare, av, Sepelire, Iv, Servare, av, Teirere, u, to plough to hear to tear in pieces. to swear. to praise to show. to appease to bury. to keep, to observe. to terrify, to frighten. (arable), (audible). (laudable.) (placable.) 196. Exercises. , (a) 1. Puer juraverat. 2. Pueri juraverunt. 8. Agri- cola araverit. 4. Servi araverint. 5. Yulpes pueros terruit. 6. Yulpes pueros terruerunt. 7. Poetae sa^i- entiam parvi aestimavit. 8. Yeram virtutem magni aestimaverat. 9. Christi- anus pecuniam parvi aestimavit. 10. Christiani est pecuniam parvi aestimare. 11. Magnam poetae sapi- * The Icamcr will readily form the mcotid root from the firtt^ by Pxldiog the eudings here given. I 197 — 199.] VERBS.—THIRD CONJUGATION. 93 entiam parvi aestimaverant. 12. Pater filium sepeli- vit. 13. PuSri patrem sepeliverant. {b) 1. The boy has heard a voice. 2. The boys had heard their father's voice. 3. The slave had shown the way to the shepherd. 4. They will have shown the house to their master. 5. Caius had praised his son. 6. He has praised his slaves. 7. The lion has torn the horse in pieces. 8. The fox had frightened the boy. 9. They had valued wisdom at a low price. 10. It is easy to keep (one's) word. 11. It is difficult to appease anger. 12. He has appeased the boy's anger with a gift. LESSON XXXYI. Third Conjugation.— Class I— Second Eoot the same as the First. 197. Most verbs of the third conjugation may be divided into two classes, viz. : • 1) Those which have the second root the same aa the first. 2) Those which form it by the addition of s. 198. T\iQ first class comprises most verbs of this con- jugation which have the first root in a vowel, together with a few which have it in a consonant ; e. g., Suerd, to sew: 1st root^ su; 2d root^ sii. Defendere, to cfe/enc?.- " defend; " defend. 199. The manner in which the third persons of the tenses for completed action are formed from the second root, has already been explained. See 193, 194. ^ ilv ! r 94 FIRST LATIN BOOK. PARADIGM. [200—202. TraRD CONJUGATION. Defendere, to defend: 1st root, defend; 2d root, defend. Perfect. PluperfeeU Future Perfect. Defend-It, defend-erat, defend-erit. Defend-erunt, defend-erant, defend-erini 200. The Prefposition is the part of speech which ex- presses the various relations of objects ; * e. g., Eex per urbem ambulabat. {The king through the city was walking.) The king was walking through the city. Rem. — In this exan^ple, per, through, is a preposition. 201. Partial Eule of Syntax.— Some preposi- tions govern the accusative, and some the ablative. Rem. 1. — Whenever a preposition occurs in the exercises, its particu- lar case will be given in the vocabularies. Rem. 2. — The accusative, urbem, in the above example, is governed by the preposition per. 202. YOCABULARY. building, edifice. to walk. to assent, to ^ve assent council, meeting. •■ condition, terms. Constituere, constitu, to arrange, to appoint (constitutej, Defendere, defend, to defend. Dormlre, iv, to sleep (dormant). Incendere, incend, to set on fire, to burn (incendiary.) Legift, onis, legion, body of foot-soldiers. Per (prep. with, ace), through. Proelium, l, battle. Aedif i:Ium, i, Ambulare, av, Annuere, annu, Concilium, i, ConditiS, 5ni8, • It xinll bfl rATirjfimhfirerl- Vin-TO-pvor fhpt r<»rfi!»» yol"*?"-:! timea expressed by the cases of noims (63, 80, 86). 203.1 Privalus, a, um, Reliquua, a, um, Respuere, respu, Rom am (adj. pi), Romanus, a, lim, Suere, bu, Timere, u, Vestls, Is, VERBS. private, personal. remaining, the rest (rdic), to reject. Romans. Roman, belonging to Rome. to sew, to stitcli. to fear (timid), garment (vest). 203. Exercises. SO is VSQ SCBIO' (a) 1. Privatum aediiicmm incendit. 2. Bellt^oa privata aedificia incenderant. 3. Puellae vestem sue- runt. 4. Patres annuerant. 5. Milites urbem defende- rant. 6. Komani urbem defenderunt. 7. Keliquas legiones in acie constituit. 8. Ursi in antro dormiverunt. 9. Agricola per urbem ambulavit. 10. Non respuit conditionem Caesar. 11. Diem conci- lio constituerunt. 12. Diem concilio constituent. 13. Servus viam monstraverat. 14. Puer mortem timuit. 15. Humdnum^ est mortem timere. 16. Impii'' est fidem violare. (6) 1. Tbe king has appointed a day for the battle. 2. They had appointed a day for the council. 3. The soldiers defended the building. 4. They had defended the poet's house. 5. The queen assented. 6. The king had not assented. 7. The good boy will walk in the city. 8. The poet's daughter had walked through the great city. 9. They will set the house of the poet on fire. 10. It is the duty^ of a good man to defend the house of a friend. 11. The avaricious (man) will build a small house. 12, They will not defend the house of the avaricious. 13. They will not reject the condition. 14. Caesar had re- jected the terms. 15. He v/ill have arranged his sol- 96 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [204—206. dicrs iu order of battle. 16. They had arranged their soldiers in order of battle. LESSON XXXVII. Third Covfitgation.— Class 11.— Second "Root formed by adding s to the First. 204. Yerbs of the third conjugation which have the first root in a consonant, generally form the second from it by the addition of 5; e. g., Carper^, to pluck; 1st root, cuTj^] 2d roo^;, carps. MpeiG, to creep \' " rep; " reps. Rem.— When b stands at the end of the first root, it is changed into p before a in the second ; e. g,, ScribSrg, to write ; scrib ; scrips (not scribs). Nubgrg, to marry; nQb; nups (not nubs). 205. An adjective modifying the subject is some- times used in Latin instead of an adverb modifying the verb ; e. g , Portam invitus claudet. {Lat Id.) The gate unwilling he will shut {adj.). (Eng, Id.) He will shut the gate unwillingly {adv.). 206. Vocabulary. Carpere, carps, DeglQbere, deglups, Lsina, ae, Ladere, iQs, Malus, a, ilin, Ovis, Is, Scrlbere, scrips, uva, uc. to pluck, to card, to gather. to flay. wool. to play bad. sheep. to write. grape. 207,208.] VERBS.— THIRD CONJUGATION. 1)7 207. Eocercises. (a) 1. Caius epistolas sua manu scripsit. 2. Paella epistolam sua manu scripserat. 3. Pueri lanam carpse- runt 4. Malus pastor deglupsit oves. 5. Facile est* lanam carpere. 6. Pater mens fidem servaverat. 7. Turpe est fidem suam non servare. 8. Sapientis est* virttitem magni aestimare. 9. Virtutem magni aestimaverint. {b) 1. The boy has written a letter in his own hand. 2. The girl had written letters in her own hand. 3. They wrote letters. 4. The girl has plucked a flower. 5. The shepherd's daughter had gathered flowers with her own hand. 6. The boy will pluck the grape. 7. It is easy to pluck the grape. 8. The girls were gathering flowers. 9. They had gathered flowers. 10. It is easy to gather flowers. 11. The slaves will card the wool. 12. They will have carded the wool. 18. In winter the bear will sleep in the cave. 14. In summer the girls will play in the garden. LESSON xxxvni. Third Conjugation. — Class II., contmited. — Second Boot formed hy adding s to the First. 208. When a ^-sound (c, g, h, qu) stands at the end of the first root, it generally unites, in the second, witli the s which is added, and forms x (i. e. cs, gs, Jis, or qua becomes x) ; e. g.. * What is the subject of est F (608, 2.) 98 riliST LATIN BOOK. [209, CingSrS, to surround ; cing, cinx {cingi), T^gSro, to cover; tSg, tex {tegs), TrahSrS, to draw; trah, trax {trahs). CoquSrd, to cooh, coqu, cox [coqus). a) In a very few verbs gu and v must be treated as i'-sounds in the formation of the second root ; e. g., Exstingu&5, to extinguish ; exstin^w, extinaj. Yivere, to live; viv. vice. h) Fluercj to flow, and struerej to build, together wiUi ihmr compounds^ have the second root in jc, as if the first ended in a ^-sound, as probably it did originally. c) The ^-sound is sometimes dropped before s in the second root; e. g., Spargere, to scatter ; Mergere, to merge; Parcere, to spare; 209. VOCABULABY. sparg, spars, merg, mers. pare, pars. Cibus, I, Cingere, cinx, Complere, ev, Coquere, cox, Dicere, dix. Habere, habu, lUustr&re, Siv, Mendacium, I, Multa (neut. pi), Multus, a, um. Pallium, I, Peccare, av, Pradentia, ae, Simulati5, cms, Stultltla, ae, food. to surround. to fill to cook, to bake, to ripen. to say •■ to have to illuminate, to enlighten. lie, falsehood many (things). much, pi many. cloak to sin, to do wrong. prudence. assumed appearance, pretence follv (complement). (dictum), (habit). (mendacious)^ (to palliate). (dissimvlatUm (stultify). 210.] Summus, a, una, highest, greatest Tegdrd, tex, to cover. Violard, av, to violate, to break VERBS.- -THIRD CONJUGAnON-. 99 (summit), (violation). 210. Exercises. (a) 1. Puer dixit. 2. Caius, homo vita indigniia, dixerat. 8. Puellae dixerunt. 4. Flumen urbem cinxit. 6. Flumina urbes cinxerunt. 6. Amicua amioi corpus suo pallio texit. 7. Prudentiam simulatione stultitiae tex^rat. 8. Summam prudentiam simulatione stultitiae texerunt. 9. Christian! non est mendacio culpam tegSre. 10. Turpc est peccare. 11. Turpe est mendacio culpam tegSre. 12. Sol cuncta sua luce illustraverat. 18. Caius leges civitatis violaverit. {b) 1. The woman has surrounded her head with a garland. 2. The slave has surrounded his head with a garland. 3. They had surrounded their heads with garlands. 4. The boy had said nothing. 5. The girl cooked the food. 6. They had cooked the food.- 7. The king had surrounded the city with a wall. 8. They will surround the city with a wall. 9. They covered the fault with a lie. 10. It is disgraceful to cover a fault with a lie. 11. The slave had covered his master's body with a cloak. 12. The slave had said many (things). 13. The sun fills all things with its light. 14. It is the business of the slave* to cook food for his master. 15. It is never useful to lose time. 16. He will lose much pleasure.* 17. How much pleasure will he lose ? 100 nilST LATIN BOOK. [211—213. i LESSON XXXTX. Third Conjiujation. — Class II., corctinued. — Second Eoot formed hy adding s to the First. 211. Whenever a i-sound {d or t) stands at the end of the first root, it is generally dropped before 5 in the Bccord, and the preceding vowel, if thort, is length- ened ; e. g., Claudert^, to shut; claud, clans (clanc?s). Amittere, to hse; umitt, amis (ami^te). Divider^, to divide; divid, divis (divic?s). 212. When a limiting noun denotes some character- istic or quality of the noun which it limits, it is always accompanied by an adjective, and is put either in the genitive or ablative ; e. g., Puer eximiae pulchritudinis. Puer eximia pulchrittidinS. A boy of remarkable beauty. 218. Combining the above with the rule already given (65), we have the following Rule of Syntax. — A noun limiting the meaning of another nonn is put, 1) In lus ( . '. case as that noun, when it denotes th^^ saine ^jerson or thing; as, Latinus recc, Latinus the king. 2) In the genitive, when it denotes a different person or thing; as, Begis filius, the Jdngh son: except (a) When it denotes character or quality, it is then accompanied by an adjective, and is put either in the genitive or ablative; as. Pmr eximias puhhr^tudmis; 214--216.] VERBS. — THIRD CONJUOATION. 101 or, Puer eximid pulchritudme, a boy of remarkable beauty. ^ 214. Rule of SyNTAx—Yerbs of accusing, convict, ing, acquitting, ivarning, and the like, take the accusa- tive of the person and tlio genitive of the crime, charge, &c. ; e. g., Caiiim proditionls accusant. ( Caius of treachery they accuse.) They accuse Caius of treachery.* UnL—Uere prSdXtiOnXa is ia the genitive, by tho abov-e rule. 215. (Eng. Id.) To condemn to death. (Lat. Id.) To condemn of the head {capitis).^ 216. YOGABULARY. AccQsare, av, to accuse. Ambitus, Qs, Amittere, amis. Capitis (gen.), Claudere, claus, Damnare, av, bribery, to lose, of the head, to death (capital). Fades, (51, Furtum, i, Ingenium, I, Lodere, iQs, Nunquam, Proditi5, onls, Saltare, av, ViT,l virl, to shut to condemn. face, appearance. theft talent, ability to play. never. treachery. to dance. man, hero. (close). (furtive), (ingenious). * Thia genitive is not properly governed by the verb, but by a noun onaerstood ; thus, if we supply cHrnlr^ with prOdltidnXs in the example tbe sense wiH not be changed; as, 'They accuse Caius with tJ^ charge of treacherr.* t We may suppose that it was originaUy, « to condemn to the lots of the head;" or, " to the punishment of the head." ^ -^Smo, a. h^mUts, and vir are both man: hut homo is man at opposed to other animala; that is, a human being, whereas vtrisman 102 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [217. .! 5 217. Exercises. (a) 1. Portas urbis clauserant. 2. Caius multuni tempSris amisit. 3. Caius, vir summo ingenio, mul- tum tcmporis amisit. 4. Balbum ambitus accusavS- rant. 5. Pu&i in prato lusOrunt. 6. Balbum capitis damnabunt. 7. Christiani est avaritiam damnare. 8. Caium accusavit. 9. Caium, Bummo ingenio virum, proditionis accusaverat. 10. Facile est saltare. 11. Difficile est iram placare. 12. Facile est pucri animum dono placare. 13. Ursus in antro dormivit. 14. Hicme ursi in antris dormiunt. 15. Nunquam utile est peccare. {!)) 1. The slave has sliut tbe gates of tlie city. 2. They will accuse the slave of treachery. 3. Caius had accused the slaves of theft. 4. He will "have lost much time.* 5. Balbus, a man of the greatest virtue, has praised the fidelity of the slave. 6. Balbus, a man en- dued with the greatest virtue, has accused the boy of theft. 7. They have accused Balbus of bribery. 8. They had accused Balbus, a man of the gr-^atest virtue, of bribery. 9. The sun had illuminated all things with its light. 10. The sun will have, filled the world with its light. 11. They have written the letters with their own hands. 12. The queen had written a letter with her own hand. 13. He covered his face with his cloak. 14. They had covered their faces with their cloaks as opposed to toujnoji. — When men means human beings, men generaliy (includlDg both sexes), it sLoxild be translated by homines. — When man IS used contemptuously, it should also be translated by homo, because that word says nothing bettor of a person than that he is a human being.— l»ted by vlr 218, 219.J FOliMATION UF SECOND ROOT. 103 LESSON XL. Formation of the Second lloot. — First Irrcguhrity — Radical vowel lengthened {and often changed), 218. Eegular Endings of tlie Second Root of Verbs. Conj. L av. Cornj. II. u {or ev). Conj. IIL s, or like Ist root Covj. IV. IV. Rem. — The above table presents only the regular endings of the second root; there are, however, several irregularities in the forroation of that root which we must notice. 219. Some verbs in each* of the four conjugations form the second root by lengthening the vowel of the first; e. g., Juvare, to assist; juv. Videre, to see; Vid, vid. Edere, to eat; dd, ed. Yenire, to come; ven, ven. 1) In the third conjugation, a) K the first root has a, the second will have e. h) .^and n are often dropped beft>re a final mute ; e. g., Capere, to take ; cap, cep (a changed to e). Frangere, to Jrea^ ; fransj, freff ■! ^ , ,'. v °' ° ( a changed to e). Rumpere, to hurst; rump, rup (m dropped). Vincere, to conqiter ; vine, vTc {n dropped). * lu the first and fourth coujugatioa3,^°MyarS, liJifvaT\vi'HltB, and their •ompounds, are probably the only instances. 104 J, .Jl J FIRST LATIN B005, [220, 221 220. Vocabulary. JBrachium, I, arm. Capere, cep, to take, to receive. Cibus, I, food. Emere, em, to buy. Exercitus, Qs, army. Foedus, erls, treaty {federal). Frangere, fr6g, to break ^Jragile). Gallus, i, ( a Gaul, an inhabitant of GmuI, ( now France. Lavare, lav, to wash (lave). Mel, mellis, honey Miles, itTs, soldier (military). N6m6, inis,* nobody, no one. Quia, because. Rumpere, rfip, to break, to violate Semper, always. Utilis, e, useful (utility). Venire, ven, to come. Videre, vld, to see (visible). Vinculum, I, chain. 221. Exercises. (a) 1. Balbus manus lavit. 2. Pueri manus lav§- rant. 3. Agricola exercitum vidit. 4. Milites vene* runt. 5. Caius bracMum suum fregerat. 6. Quantum voluptatis ceperunt I 7. Nunquam utile est foedus rumpere. 8. Nunquam utile est fidem violare, quia semper est turpe. 9. Fa- cile est puerorum animos donis placare. 10. Turpe est fo«d^ra negligere. 11. Galli negligebant foedera. 12. Nemo semper laborat. 13. Culpas suas simulatione virtutis texit. 14. Multura voluptatis ceperant. 15. * The gea nemliiia and abl. ncmXm are not in good use. 222.] FORMATION OF SECOND ROOT. 105 Multum voluptatis amiserant. 16. Quantum cibi amiserunt I (h) 1. Caius has broken bis arm. 2. Tbey had broken their arms. 3. The king had broken the treaty. 4. The Gauls had broken the treaty. 5. Caesar had seen the army. 6. The girls will have seen the queen. 7. Caesar conquered the Gauls. 8. The Gauls did not conquer Caesar. 9. It is disgraceful to break a treaty. 10. It is diffi. cult to conquer the Gauls. 11. It is not easy to con- quer the enemy. 12. He had appeased Balbus. 13. They wiU break their chains. 14. They had broken their chains. 15. It is easy to break (one's) arm. 16. They are losing much money. 17. They had lost much money. 18. They were losing much pleasure. 19. They will condemn Balbus to death (215). 20. He had conquered his enemies. LESSON XLI. Formation of the Second Root.— Second Irregulanty^ Reduplication. 222. A FEW verbs of the first, second, and third conjugations, form the second root by prefixing to the first their initial consonant, with the following vowel or with e; e. g., MTe^togive; d, ded. Mordere, to bite; mord, momord. Curreie, to run ; curr, cucurr. Rem.— The radical vowel ia also sometimes c'langed ; as, cMf«, to fall ; 2d root cMd {& changed to \). ni!!i!l ioc first latin book. 223. Vocabulary. [223, 224. Ab (prep, with all), from. Auctumnus, i, autumn. Barbs, ae, beard. Color, Oris, color. Currere, cucurr, to run. Dare, ded, to give. Finis, is, m. or/. end. Humerus, I, shoulder. Mordere, momord. to bite. Matare, av, to change. Nox, noctis, night. Pendere, pepend, to hang (intrans.y. Per (prep, with accus ) through. Sagitta, ae, arrow. Tondere, totond, to shear, shave. 224. Exercises. (a) 1. Eqims per urbem cucurrit. 2. Sagittae ab humero pependerunt. 3. Nox proelio (648) finem dedit. 4. Mains pastor oves nou totondit. 5. Malua pastor deglupsit oves ; non totondit. 6. Boni pastoris^ est tondere oves, non deglubere. 7. Pastores agricolas riserunt. 8. Lupus boni pastoria ovem momorderit. 9. Boni canis^ non est oves mor- dere. 10. Servus portas urbis clauserit. 11. Pugri regis sceptrum videbunt. 12. Lusciniae colorem muta- bunt. 13. Auctumno lusciniae colorem suum mutav^- rint. {b) 1. The dog has bitten the sheep. 2. Your dog had bitten the girl. 3. My horses have been running (have run). 4. Balbus has given his dog to your son. 5, They had given their dogs to the shepherd. 6. The wolf had bitten the sheep. 7. The shepherd v.'iii vShear nis sheep, u. A shepherd does not sheai 226.] FORMATION OF SECOND ROOT. 107 his sheep in the winter. 9. The wolves have bitten my dog. 10. Gains will shave (his) beard. 11. The cloak was hanging from (his) shoulder. 12. The dog has bitten the wolf. 13. They wrote the letter. 14. Bal- bus had shaved (his) beard. 15. The girls have pluck- cd flowers in Caius's garden. 16. The girls will walk in the garden. 17. The queen was walking through the city. 18. They have surrounded the city with walls. 19. They have offended-against the laws of their country. LESSON XLII. Formation of the Second Hoot. — Third Irregularity — Second root after the analogy of other conjugations. 225. A FEW verbs in each conjugation form the se- cond root according to the analogy of one or more of the other conjugations. 1) A few in the first conjugation follow the analogy of the second ; e. g., Micare, to glitter: 1st root, mic; 2d root, micii. 2) A few in the second follow the analogy of the third; e. g., Ridere, to laugh; 1st root, nd; 2d root,.m (rids). MgGie^ to mourn ; " lug; " Ivx (higa). 3) A few in the third follow the analogy of the second or fourth ; e. g., Colore, to till; 1st root, col; 2d root, oolH. Pdtere, to seek . " pet, petiv. i, ) 108 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [226— 22a W'm 4) A few in the fourth follow the analogy of the second or third ; e. g., Apc^rire, to open; 1st root, djoer; 2d root, dperu. Yinciie, to hind ; " vine; " vinx {cs). Rem. — Verbs of the Uxird conj. which have the Ist root in se, together with a few others, generally change the consonant-ending of the Ist root into v in the 2d ; as, crescerS, to increase; Ist root, erese ; 2d, crSv. Most of these verbs are supposed to have been derived from pure roots. 226. Rule of Syntax. — Length of time is gener- ally expressed by the accusative ; e. g., Caiiis annum unum vixit. {Caius year one lived.) Caius lived one year. 227. Rule of Syntax. — The name of a town (91) where any thing is or is done, if of the first or second declension, and singular number, is put in the genitive I otherwise, in the ablative ; e. g., 1. Caiiis annum uniim Cortonae vixit. Caius lived one year at Cortona. 2. Caiiis annum unum Tibv/re vixit. Caius lived one year at Tihir, Rem. — In these examples, Cortdnae and TlbiirS are names of towns; the first is put m the genitive, because it is of the first declensicM], and sing, number, and the second in the ablative, because it is of the third declension. 228. Vocabulary. Amittere, amiB, AnnQs, I, Aperlre, ap5ru, Bienniiim, ("astigare, av, to lose. year. to open, to uncover. two years, space of two years. to chastise. 229.] FORMATION OF SECOND ROOT. 106 • Jnvltus, a, um, Loggro, lux, Manure, mans, Matrona, ae, Roma, ae, Tiour, una, Totus, a, um (g. lus). unwilling. to grieve, mourn, weep fov. to remain. matron. Rome, a city of Italy, on the Tibet. Tibur, a town in Latium, in Italy. the whole, the entire. 229. Exercises. (a) 1. Balbus multos annos Eomae mansdrat. 2. Biennium Carthagine manserant. 3. Mater luxdrit' 4. Matronae luxemnt. 5. Brutum Eomanae matronao luxerunt. 6. Pastores agricolas riserunt. 7. Pueri capita aperuerunt. 8. Dominus servi sui epistolam aperiet. 9. Domlnus sem sui epistolas aperuerat. 10. Aliquid tem-^oris* invitus (205) amittet. 11. Christiani est neminem vio- lare. 12. Neminem violavit. 13. Biennium Eomao manebit. 14. Biennium Cartliagine manebunt. {h) 1. They remained at Tibur many years. 2. Caiua remained at Carthage for the space-of-two-years. 3 He has opened his father's letter. 4. They had opened the letters at Carthage. 5. My father wiU remain at Rome the whole win- ter. 6. He wrote the letters at Eome. 7. They are mourning for ' their son. 8. They have been in mourn- mg two years. 9. The girls wore mourning for ' their mother. 10. My father values industry very highly !o* wf^"^^ ^""^ ''''^'^®^ *^® shepherd's son of theft U. i hey have accused Caius of bribery. 6 110 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [230—234 , ' i ' } LESSON XLIII. Subjunctive Mood. 230. The Suhjunctive Mood represents the action or state expressed by the verb, not as a /oc^, but simply as a. possibiUt2/j tvish, or conception of the mind; e. g., ihe may write, may lie write, let him write. « ,^ w w 1 wM be has come that he may tmfe, 2. Venit ut sonbat, | ^^ ^^ ^^^ ^ ^.^ Rem. — ScrlbSt in the above examples is in the present subjunctive. 231. The present subjunctive, when not preceded by iltj generally expresses either a wish (to be translated by may he), or a command (to be translated by lei him, &c.). 232. If the wish or command is to be expressed neg- atively, ne (never non) must be used with the subjunc- tive ; e. g., Ne piitet, let him not think. 233. The tenses of the subjunctive mood* are the present, imperfect, perfect, and pluperfect. 234. The endings of the third persons sing, of the tenses of the subjunctive are as follows : Present Imperfect. Perfect Pluperfect. (1st root.) (lat root.) (2d root. (2d root.) Conj. I. et, aret, erit, isset. Conj. II. eat, eret, erit. isset. Conj. III. at, eret, erit, isset. Conj. IV. lat, iret. erit. jsset. * The subjunctive has no futures. »285, 236.] SUBJUNCTIVE mood. m RiM—lTie third persons plural of the several tenses of the subjuno five are formed by inserting n before t in iho ending of the third singular , 235. The English signs corresponding to the Latin subjunctive are as follows : r Present, may or can. Imperfect, might, could, would, or sh&ulJ. Perfect, may have. Pluperfect, might, could, wmld, or should have. 236. Partial Paradigm of the Subjunctive Mood. Singular. Pres. Am-gt, he may or can love. Imp. Am-ar6t, lie might, - orNostrl, \ ^J Nobis, to us. Nos, us. us. Nobis, with us. SINGULAR. 2d Person. Tu, thou. Tul, o/'i/iee. TiH, to or for tJiee. Tu, O thou. Te, zfiife thee. PLURAL. Vos, ye or you. Vestrum, ) - or Vestrl, \ ""fV''''' Vobis, to you. Vos, you. Vos, O ye or you. Vobis, with you. 3d Person. Sui, of himself, herself itself. Sibif, ^0 himself &c. Se, himself. Se, «?t77i himself. Sul, of themselves. Sib!, io themselves. Se, themselves. Se, tci^A themselves. 258. As the ending of the verb shows the person of ua subject, the nominative of pronouns is seldom ex- pressed as the subject, except for the sake of emphasis or contrast. 122 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [259, 260. i 'J ■ti; IH 259. Vocabulary. Agere, fig, to drive, to lead, to do De (prep, with all.) , from, concerning. Dedere, dedid, to surrender. Demonstrare, av, to show, to demonstrate (demonsiratwri). Ego, L Errare, av. to err (error). Exponere, exposu, to set forth, to explain (expose). Facere, (i6), fee, to make, to do, to act. Gratia, ae, gratitude, favor, fl. thanks. Gratias llgere. to give thanks. Iter, itinerls, n. journey, route (itinerant). Judicare, av, to judge (Judicature). Occultare, av. to conceal (occultaiion). Poscere, poposc, , to demand. Res, rSl, thing, affair, subject. Sed, but. Sensus, Os, feeling, perception (sense). To thou, you. 260. Exercises. (a) 1. Eem omnem exposui. 2. Erravi. 3. Ego de meo sensu judico. 4. Ego misi vires : pueros tu misisti. 6. Hesterno die Balbum ad me vocavi. 6. Yds judicavistis. 7. Nos judicabimus. 8. MiM gra- tias egistis. 9. Caius itinera nostra servabat. 10. Fidem euam inviti servaverunt. 11. Agricolae est laborare. 12. Caius, ut demonstravimus, itinera nostra servabat. 13. Caesar servos poposcit. 14. Nos servos non poposclmus. (5) 1. We have read your letters. 2. You were play- ing, but /was writing. 3. He has given me a beauti- M book. 4. He will give you {to you) tbanks. 5. We shall thank you. 6. T h.ad called the boy t-o me. 261.] SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.— FOUK CmjUGATIONS. 123 7. Yesterday you caUed the girls to you. 8. We have never opened your letters. 9. I have kept my word. 10. You have never broken, your word. 11. They have accused you of theft. 12. The judge has condemned us to death (215). 13. We will not accuse you of treachery. 14. We sliall not remain in the city. LESSON XLYII. Subjunctive Mood.—Four Conjugations. 261. Paeadigm of the Subjunctive Mood. Conj. L Am-em, Am-es, Am-ei ; Am-ewiMS, Am-efis, Am-ew/. PRESENT (1st root), may or Conj. II. Mon-eam, Mon-eas, Mon-eai ; Mon-eamus, M6n-ea«is, Mon-eani. Cu8 eris, M6nTt.u8 erit ; M6n1t-i grlmus, Monlt-I erltliB, M6nlt-I erunt. Rect-u8 erS, Rcct-u8 eris, Rect-U8 drltj Rect-I SrlmuB, Rcct-I eritls, Rect-I erunt Audlt-Qa 5r6, Audit-U3 eris, Audlt-Qs grit; Audlt-I erTmus, Audlt-I eritis, Audlt-I erunt J 840. Vocabulary. AccQsare, av, at, to accuse. Admonere, u, it, to admonish^ warn. Bene, well. Carthaglniensis, is, a Carthagi. nian. Clipeus, I, shield. Damnare, av, at, to condemn. Discere, didic, to learn. Donare, av, at, to give, present. Excltare, av, at, to excite^ arouse. Finire, iv, it, to finish. Graecl, Orum, the Greeks. HastJl, ae, spear, Laudare, av, at, to praise. Mensis, Is, m., month, Motare, av, at, to change, November, bris (abl. i),November Pognare, av, at, to fight, Ponire, iv, It, to punish. Super ard, av, at, to surpass, txn quer, to go over. 341. Exercises. (a) 1. Tempora mutantur et nos mutamur in iLis- 2. Finitur labor agricolae mense Novembri. 3. Yos laudainini, pueri qui bene didicistis. 4. Donabor clipco et hasta, si bene pro patria pngnavero. 5. AdmonebS- ris, ne iram excites.' 6. Graeci a Romanis auperati sunt. 7. Eodem anno Cartbaginienses et Graeci a Bo- manis superati sunt 8. Proditionis accusati eetis. 9. Ambitus accusati sumus. (6) 1. You will be punisbed. 2. Has be not been punished ? 8. "We have been admonished not to ac« * Pu6r8 13 sometimes used instead of f«ro (331, K). 8 158 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [Si'A cuse tlie king. 4. Has tlie queen been condemned tc deatli ? • (No.) 5. Who will be condemned to deatli 7 6. Who have been accused of treason ? 7. We shall be presented with two beautiful books. 8. Have you not been presented with a very fine dog ? 9. Had not the Greeks been conquered by the Romans ? 10. By whom were the Romans conquered? 11. We shall bp conquered by the enemy. LESSON LIX. Subjunctive Mood of Hie Passive Voice. 842. Paradigm of the Subjunctive Passive. Conj. I. Am-er, Am-ens (re), Am-Mir ; Am-emwr, Am-ewini, Am-e7iiMr. Present (Ist root), may or can he loved, &c. Conj. IL Mon-ear, M6n-eans (re), M6n-ea% f/. % I I i i w I i : 170 riRST LATIN BOOK. [374-579.. 874. KuLE OF SYNTAX—The gerund is governed like a noun in the same case ; e. g., \ Intdr ludendiim. {During playing.) Wliile they are playing. 375. The Latin verb has two supines ; one in mw» and one in u, 876. The supines are formed by adding the above endings to the third root; e. g., Amatum (to love), monitiim, rectum, auditiim. Amatu (to be loved), monitu, rectu, auditu. Rem.— The supine in «m is generally Englished by ihe present infijoi, *ive active, and that in U by the present infinitive passive, though it may be translated by the active, if that gives better English. Both supines are really active; itoB, factum mesm for doing, and factiJL in doing. 877. Rule of Syntax— -The supine in Hm follows verbs of motion, to express the purpose or object of that motion ; e. g., Mittit legates pacem^eii^MW. He sends ambassadors ix> s;mfor peace. 378. Rule of Syntax.— The supine in u is used after adjectives signifying good or lad, easy or dijjicult, agreeahh or disagreeable, &c. ; e. g., Difficnd est dicta. It is difficult to say, 879. Rule of Syntax.— Many adjectives signifying desire, knowledge, shill, participation, recollection, fulness. 880, 381.] GERUNDS AND SUPINES. 171 and the lUce^ together with their contraries, govern tho genitive; e.g., Cupidiis laudis, desirous of praise. 380. Vocabulary. Aquarl, at, to bring water. Aquatiim (sm|).)» 'o bring water. Auxilium, I, aid, li^lp. Cupidus, a, um, desirous^ desi^ rous of. jQcundus, §, um, pleasant, de- lightful. Mirabilis, e, wonderful. Pabularl, at, to forage. PabulatQm (sup.), to forage, Petere, Iv (i). It, to seek, aaky sw for. Rogare, av, at, to ask. Sumptus, OS, expense. Supervacuus, i, um, unneeessari/^ VenarT, at, to hunt. Venatum (sup.), to hunt, Vltare, av, at, to avoid, shun.. 381. Exercises, (a) 1. Cupidi sirnt docendi. 2. Num pueri ludendo discunt? 3. Puer cupidus est discendi. 4. Miserunt legatos pacem petitum. 5. Legatos ad Caesarem mit- tunt rogatum auxilium. 6. Jucundum est auditu. 7. Difficile est factu. 8. Mittantur legati pacem petitum. 9. Quantum temporis ludendo amiserunt 1 10. Multum temporis ludendo amittemus. {b) 1. He learns by teaching. 2. Have we not learned by teaching? 3. Is there not much pleasure in learning ? 4. How much pleasure (there) is in learn- ing I 5. There is much pleasure in teaching. 6. Do not boys learn while playing? 7. The boy has been sent a hunting, 8. Caesar has sent the fourth legion to forage. 9. Ambassadors have been sent to ash peace. 10. It is difficult to say. 11. It is wonderful to tell 12. Has not Caesar sent the fourth legion to bring uxUerf 172 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [382—384 LESSON LXIV. Participle in dus. 382. Instead of a gerund governing its case, we may use a particijpk in dva agreeing with a noun ; e. g., (Eng.) The intention of writing a letter. {Lat) Consilium scrtbendi ^pistolam. (or) Consilium scribendae epistolae.* 383. Thus, then, epistolci scrtbendd may be declined throughout. Sing. N. Epislola scribenda, a letter to he written. G. epistolae scribendae, of writing a letter.^ D. epistolae scribendae, to orfor writing a letter. Ace. (ad) epistolam scribendam, to write a letter (or for writing a letter). Abl. epistola scribenda, hy writing a letter Plur. N. epistolae scribendae, letters to be written. G. epistolarum scribendanim, of writing letters. D. epistolis scribendis, to or for writing letters. Ace. (ad) epistolas scribendas, to write letters {or for writing letters). Abl. epistolis scribendis, hg writing letters. 884. YOCABULABY. Adj amentum, I, aid, help. Arripere (ifl), arrlpu, arrept, to snatchf seize. Athenae, arum, Alliens^ city of Greece. Augere, aux, aact, to increase. * Th« real meaning of ' consilium Bcribendae epistolae' is ' the derign o/'(— i about) a lelier to be writtea' 385.] PAKTICIPLB IN DUS. 173 CupTdi&r, oris (comp.\ fonder. Elegantia, ae, elegance, Emere, em, empt, to buy, pur- chase. Exercere, exercu, exercit, to practise, exercise. Ger^re, gees, gest, to carry on, to wage. Habere, ii, it, to Jiave, enjoy. Li'gere, leg, lect, to read, Obtinere, obtlnu, obtent, to ob^ tain, acquire. Occasid, OniB, opportunity, Peritus, a, um, skilful, skilled in. R^gere, rex, rect, to govern rule. Studiosus, &, urn, very fond. 385. Exercises. (a) 1. Balbus omnem occasionem exercendae virtutia arripiebat. 2. Multi cupidiores sunt e/nencSSrum libra- rum quam legendorum, 3. Caesar belli gei f .idi peritus fuit. 4. Omnis occasio exercendae virtutis arripiatur. 5. Certum est, omnem occasionem exercendae virtutis a Christiano arripi. 6. OmniL dicendi elegantia auge- tur legendis oratoribus et poetis. 7. Homo magna habet adjumenta ad obtinendam sapicntiam. (b) 1. The boy is very fond of writing letters. 2, He was very fond of hearing the orator. 8. Seize every opportunity oi jpractising virtue, 4. The Eomans were fond of lixiging war, 5. Ambassadors are sent to beg for peace. 6. Ambassadors will be sent to sue for peace. 7. The law will be broken. 8. Will not the laws be broken by wicked (men) ? 9. It is certain, that the laws are broken by the wicked at Eome and at Athens. 10. Let your word be kept. 11. Let the state be ruled by the wise. 174 FIKST LATIN BOOK. [386, 887 . ' LESSON LXV. First Conjugation. 886. Vocabulary.* AdeO, sOf in such a manner. Cantare, &v, &t, to sing. Certainen, inis, contest. Crabrd, onis, wasp. Inter, betweent during. Inter ambulandum, while walkittg, Irrlt&re, av, at, to troubkt irritate. Omare, av, at, to adorn. Robustus, %, um, robust, strong, Spoliare, av, at, to rob of, despoil. 887. Exercises. (a) 1. Sapientis est supervacuos sumptus vitare. 2. Crabronem no irrites (232). 3. Crabronem ne irritate (347). 4. Irritasne crabrones? 5. Nonne earn legem ipse violabas? 6. Inter ambulandum cantabant. 7. Hie miles est adeo robustus, ut nemo eum in certamine superaverit. 8. Prata et agri pulcherrimifl floribus ornantur. 9. Oculisne me, judices, privabitis? 10. Violatis patriae legibus (366), mea me laude spoliatis. 11. ISTimi mea laude spoliabor? (5) 1. It is the duty of a Ckristian^ to avoid unne- cessary expense. 2. Did tbey not themselves violate those laws ? 3. Let not the laws be violated by Chris- tians. 4. "We hope we shall' never be accused. 5. Have you ever been accused? 6. Let your laws be kept. 7. Is it not certain that the laws are broken by the wicked ? 8. Did they not condemn him to death ? 9. Balbus is so strong that he has never been surpassed in a contest. 10. Have I not been deprived of my eyes? * Preparatory to this exercise, the pupil is expected to rovietir tho- roughly t]id Faiadigm of the First Conjugatioa See 588. 888 — 390.] SECOND conjugation. 175 LESSON LXVI. Second Conjugation. 888. EuLE OF Syntax.— Many verbs wluch signify U) ashj demand, or feoc^, together with celare {to conceal), tiike two objects, one of a person and another of a thing; e.g., Caesar frumentum Aeduos flagitabat. Caesar demanded corn of the Aedui. 389. YOCABULABY.* Divitiacus, i, DivitiacuSj man's name. [mperare, av, at, to command, give commands. Jubere, juss, juss, to direct, or- der. MorJfire, momord, mors, to bite Parere, ii. It, to obey. PrOpensus, 5, um, inclined to. Sanare, av, at, to cure, reform. Tacfire, u,it, to be silent, to pass over in silence. 390. Exercises. (a) 1. Hostes non timemus. 2. Nonne respondebis? 3. Docendo docemur. 4. Ego multa tacui : multa sa- navi. 5. Ad docendum propensi sun' 6. Pareat animus: non imperet 7. Caesar Divitiacum ad se vocari jubet. 8. Te haec docebo. 9. Pugros haec docebant. 10. Pueri haec docti sunt. 11. Canis pue- rum momordit. 12. Nonne oves totondistis? (i) 1. Do you not fear the enemy? 2. Do not fear the enemy. 3. Who taught the boy this ? 4. Did you teach those boys this? 5. Who sheared this sheep? 6. Let no one shear my sheep. 7. Did the dog bite you ? 8. I have been bitten by your dog. 9. We * The pupil will, of course, review Paradigm. Sco 689. 176 FIRST LATIN BOOK. have ourselves been tauglit by teaching. not laugb at your father? [391— 89a 10. Did you LESSON LXYII. Third Conjugation, 891. EuLE OF Syntax. — ^After verbs of motion : 1) The place to which the motion is directed, if a town or small island, is put in the accusative without a preposition ; e. g., R6mam venire, to come to JRome, 2) The place from which the motion proceeds, if a town or small island, is put in the ablative without a preposition ; e. g., Roma venirS, to come from Borne, RsM. — Before other names of placea the preposition is generally expresse(^ {Review Paradigm 690.) 892. Vocabulary. AgerS, eg, act, to do, act, Committere, mis, miss, to en- gage* Corare, av, &t, to attend to, cause, &c. Dare, ded, dat, to give, Eques, itis, horseman. Gratis, ae, favor; pi., thanks. Gratias Slgere, tu give thanks, to thank. InjQiia, ae, injury, wrong done. Pons, tiB, m., bridge. Responsum, I, answer, reply. Tegere, tex, t«ct, to cover, canf ceal, UnquSm, ever. 398. Exercises. (a) 1. Caium Athenas mittat. 2. Servum AthSnas miserat. 8. Mihi gratias egistis. 4. Sicut vixi, ui 394, 895.] FOURTH conjugation. 177 nemo unquam me ullius injuriae accusaverit. 5. Pon- tem in flumine faciendum curavit. 6. Equates proe- lium committunt. 7. Hoc responso dato, equites proe- Hum committunt. 8. Certum est, Caesarem belli ge- rendi perltum fuisse. 9. Legates ad eum miserunt 10. Omnis dicendi elegantia augetur legendis orato- rn)us (382). {b) 1. He has sent an ambassador to Rome. 2. Am- bassadors will be sent to sue for (377) peace. 8. Am- bassadors have been sent to sue for peace. 4. He has never been sent to Athens. 5. He is said to have been very desirous of (379) learning. 6. They say that you are desirous of engaging battle. 7. They are said to be skilful in waging war. 8. Having made this reply they engage battle. 9. It is disgraceful to cover a fault with a lie. LESSON LXVni. Fourth Conjugation. (Review Paradigm 691.) 394. Vocabulary. Antea, hefore. Captlvus, &, urn, captive. Claudere, claus, claus, to shut. Fundus, I, estate, farm. Mannibal, 3,1ib, Hannibal. Intra (prep, with accus.\ within. It&liJi, ne, Italy. 395. Exercises, (a) 1. Haecex captivis audiverat. 2. Yenit saoer- Praeceptum,!, precept^instruclion Praesens, tis, present. Succurrere, curr, curs, to aid, succor. Tarenttim, I, Tarentum, a town in Italy. Vetustus, a, Cm, old, ancient. .1- uosut aram sanguine aspergat. 8. Miles Tarentum 178 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [396. venit. 4. Hunc aadiobant antea, nunc praesentSm vident. 5. Fundo in tres partes divlso, Romam venit 6. Veni ut mihi succurras. 7. Ilanmbal, Alpibus su- peratis, in Italiam venit. 8. Lex erat Romanorum ve* tustissima, ne quis intra urbem sepeliretur. (b) 1. Have not the boys been sent to bring water? 2. They have come to shut the gates of the city. 8. "W ill you come to shut the gates ? 4. Let them come to shut the gates. 5. Let all come to hear the instruc- tions of the wise. 6. Let the instructions of the wise be always heard. 7. By hearing the instructions of the wise we shall learn -wisdom. 8. He has buried hia father. 9. H^ he buried him within the city ? 10. Do not bury him within the city. LESSON" LXIX. Verbs with the Dative. — Indirect Object 396. The use of the indirect object has been already illustrated ; but as some verbs in Latin are followed by the dative (the case of the indirect object) where we use no preposition, and should therefore be led by. the English to put the accusative, it may be well to notice a few instances of this. The verbs of this class are principally such as signify : To command or obey^ please or displease^ favor or w** /wre, serve or resist^ together with to indulge^ spare^ par- don^ envy, believe, persuade.* * See 648 a97, 898.] INDIRECT OBJECT. 179 R«Jt 1. — VficarS (to have leiture) andnQb£r2 (Jo marry, used of f»- males), also take the dative. Rem. 2. — It will be readily perceived, in most cases, that tLe dative after the above verbs is really the indirect and not the direct ob- ject ; thus, impSrari (to command) means to give a command to; jil&c6r6 (to please) to give pleasure to; and so of most, if not all, of the others. 897. Vocabulary. Are, artis, art, Beate, happily. Credere, crSdid, credit, to believe^ put confidence in. Cupiditas, alls, desire, passion. Favere, fav, faut, to favor. IgnoscerS, nOv, not, to pardon. /ndttlgere, indula, indult, to in- dulge. (nvidere, vid, vis, to envy. Nocere, nocu, nocit, to hurt. Parcere, peperc, pareit, to spare. Persuadere, persuas, persuas, to persuade. Resbtere, stit, iitit, to resist. Servlre, Iv (i). It, to serve^ he a slave to. StM&Te, u, to study, strive for, VScare, av, at, to have leisure for. 398. Exercises. (a) 1. Irae multos annos servieras. 2. Kegendia animi cupiditatibus studeamus. 3. Caesar legendo libro vacabit. 4. Christiani est patriae suae legibua parere. 5. Ignosce mihi. 6. Nemo tibi credet. 7. Improbus patriae legibus non parebit. 8. Num legi- bus parebunt improbi, violata fide? 9. Discant Cbris- tiani anunis suis imperare. 10. Sapientia ars est bene beateque vivendi. (6) 1. I would have favored Caius. 2. You would have resisted anger. 3. You (jpl.) would bave hurt nobody. 4. We would have indulged the desire. 6. I was hurting myself. 6. You were hurting me. 7. You had hurt Caius. 8. You had been-the-slave-of passion. 9. Do not be-the slave-of passion. 10. You were sparing the enemies. 11. It is the duty of o. Chris- tian to envy nobody. 12. Do not envy the good. 18. 180 FIllST LATIN BOOK. [399-402. It ia pleasant to succor the miserable. 14. Nobody will believe the wicked. 15. Death spares nobody. 16. They had spared the gate of the city. 17. lie spares himself in the winter. 18. He does not spare even himself. 19. You will never have persuaded mo. 20. Let the Christian learn to command himself. LESSON LXX. Deponent Verbs, 899. A DEPONENT verb is one which has a jpassive form^ but an active meaning. 400. Deponent verbs have all the four participles; e. g., 1) Loquens, speaking ; 2) locutus, having spoken ; 3) locuturus, about to speak; 4) loquendus, to he spoken, Keu. — ^The past participle of a deponent verb is the participle of the perfect active, "which other verbs do not have. 401. EuLE OF Syntax. — The deponent verbs, uior^ fruor^ fungor^ potwr, vescor^ dignor^ and their com- pounds, usually take the ablative; e. g., y oluptate fruitur, lie enjoys pleasure. Bxis. — ^The (^lative after the above is not strictly the object but the abhitive of means ; thus, to enjoy pleasure, is to be delighted mth pleasure. 402. EuLE OF Syntax. — ^Yerbs of reminding , remem- bering, forgetting, and pitying, usually take the genitivi of the object remembered, forgotten, &c. ; e. g., 'DX»-v^V»>inr»J^-»« \\Xin X(^ rf\~ +TiV I /v«/v>v> /j/vyi TiyM" ni/vtiv iMinrlrtpoe t03, 404 J DEPONENT VERBS. 181 Rn*. — Most of these verbs, except thoae aignifying lo p'Uy, Bomoiimei take the ftccuMtire instead of the genitive. 403. Vocabulary. Aliquandd, some time or other. BSngficium, l, benefit, Flagitium, l, crime. Fungi, funct, to discharge, L5qul, IScQt, to speak. M&l^, badly. Mlagren, miserit, or mlsert, lo pity. Obllvisci, obllt, to forget. Odium, I, hatred, OfTicium, I, duty. Post {jirep. with accus.), after, PStlrl, potit, to get possession. Rccordari, at, to remember, 'x recall to mind. Sempiternus, &, una, eternal. UtI, Os, to use. 404. Exei'cises. (a) 1. Christianorum est miserSri paupSrum. 2. Homo improbus aliquando cum dolore flagitiorum su- orum recordabituT. 8. Multi beneficiis male utuntur. 4. Vincamus odium, paceque potiamur. 5. Christiani est injuriarum oblivisci. 6. Beatus est, qui omnibus vitae officiis fungitur. 7. Elegantiam loquendi legen- dis oratoribus et poetis auxerant. {b) 1. Let the Christian discharge all the duties of hfe. 2. Let us use our horses. 3. The good after death will enjoy eternal life. 4. Will not the good after death enjoy eternal life ? 6. Is the life that we now enjoy eternal ? 6. Let boys learn to discharge all the duties of life. 7. Have you not spared the con- quered?* 8. Spare {pi) the conquered. 9. Let us Bpare the conquered. 10. We will resist anger. 11. Will you not resist anger? 12. Let Caius, who sold * Participles aa well as adjectives (117) are sometimes used subs tan lively. 9 182 riKST LATIN BOOK. [405--407 his country for gold, be condemned to death. 13. Let the -^ickea, who sold their country for gold, be accused of treason. LESSON LXXL Irregular Verbs, 405. The irregular verbs are those which deviate ^ ^ the ordinary rules, not only in the formation of ■oots, but also in the inflection of some of their 406. The irregular verb ])osse (to be able), com- pounded oi;^t (potis, able) and esse (to be), is conju- gGted like the simple esse, except, 1) T before s becomes s ; as, possum (potsum). 2) The /in the second root is dropped; as, potu (potfu). 8) In the present infinitive and imperfect suhjunctive there is a contraction ; as, posse (for potesse), possem (for potessem). 407. Paradigm. Posse, to he able; 2d root, potu, INDICATIVE. Pres. Possum, poles, potest, possumus, potestis, possunt. Imp. poteram; Fut. poterS; Perf. p6tu-ij Pluperf. potu-eram; Fut. Per/. p6tu-er6. SUBJUNCTIVE. Pres. poasim; Imp. possem; Per/! p6tu-erim ; Pluperf. potu- issem. INFINITIVE. Pres. posse ; Perf. potu-isse. PARTIOITLE. I Potens (used as an adjective^ fotoerfuT). 408—410.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 183 408. The various forms of ^o^se are often best trans- lated by tbe auxiliaries, can^ could, &c. ; e. g., Ego fucere possum, lean do (am able to do). Rem. — When a past tense of posse b thus translated by could, any present infinitive depending upon it must be translated by tho English perfect ; e. g., Ego i&c&rQ potui, / could have done. 409. The irregular verb v c 1 1 e, /o will, or be willing, and its com- pounds, nolle, to be unwilling (from nan and velle)f and malle, to wish rather, to prefer (from mag [magis, more] and velle), arc conjugated as in the following : 410. Paradigms. Yelle. NoUd. Mails. 2d root, vdlu. 2d root, nolu. INDICATIVE. PRESENT. 2d root, malu. Vol6, Vis, Vult; Volumus, VultTs, Volunt. Nol5, Nonvis, Nonvult; Nolumus, . Nonvultis, Nolunt. IMPERFECT. Mal8, Mavis, Mavult; Malumus, Mavultis, Malunt. Vol-ebiim, bas, &c. Nol-ebam,bas, &c. rUTURE. 1 Mal-ebam, biis, &c. Vol-am. 1 Nol-am. PERFECT. I Mal-ara. Volu-I. Nolu-I. PLUPERFECT. 1 Malu-i. Volu-eram. 1 Nolu-eram. ITJTURE PERFECT. 1 Malu-eram. Volu-er5. 1 Nolu-er5. I Malu-eriS. 184 i^i iA |1 M FIKST LATIN BOOK. rARADIGM8-C07t/tnt^(2. [411, 412 SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Vel-im, is, &c. I Nol-Tm, Is, (fee. IMPERFECT. j Mal-im, Is, &c. Vell-em,es,&c. 1 Noll-em. PERFECT. 1 Mall-em. Volu-cnm. 1 Nolu-erim. Malu-erim. PLUPERFECT. Volu-isscm. 1 Nolu-issem. IMPEEATIVE. Malu-issem. \ Nol-I or Its, Nol-ite,It5te. INFINITIVE. Pres. Velle. Pej'f. Volu-issc. Nolle. Nolu-isse. PARTICIPLES. Malle. Malu-isse. Volens. I • Nolens. 411. YOCABULARY. Animal, alts, animal. Corrigere, correx, correct, to cor- rect, reform. Cor, cordis, w., heart. Malle, malu, to prefer toish ra- ther. Nolle, nolu, tc be unwilling. Nullus, a, um (113, R.), no, not any. Occidere, occid, occis, to kill. Posse, potu, to be able. Praeterltus, &, um, past; prao terita (neut. pL), the past. Probus, a, um, honest, upright. Scipi5, Onls, Scipio, a distin- guished Roman, Sine, without. Velle, voln, to tcish. 412. Exercises, (a) 1, Haec facere possiimus, 2, Haec facere potn- isti. 3. Multum disoere vult. 4. Nolui hoc flicore. il8, 414.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 185 5. Praeterita mutare non possumus. 6. Nullum ani- mal quod sanguinem habct, sine corde esse potest. 7 Discat ut possit docere. 8. Num pucri regendae civi tutis (382) periti esse possunt ? 9. Si vis beatus esse, animo impera. 10. Probi semper vitam corrigerc volunt. 11. Scipio dicebat, malle se unum civem ser- vure, quam mille bostes occidere. {h) 1. Do you wish to change the past? 2. "We do not wish to change the past. 3. You {pi) cannot change the past. 4. We cannot shun death. 5. Let us learn, that we may be able to teach others. 6. They wish to be happy. 7. "We all wish to be happy. 8. Could you not have seen the king? 9. "We might have learned much. 10. We were unwilling to accuse you. 11. Were you not unwilling to accuse the king? LESSON LXXIL Irregular Verbs, continued. 413. The irregular verb, f erre, to heaVy drops e between two r's, mferre for /erere, and i in the endings of the second and third sing act., and of the third sing. pass. It borrows its second and third roots from other verbs. 414. Paradigm. Ferre, to hear; 2d root, tul; 3d, Ut. INDICATIVE. PRES Active. Fcr-5, fcr-8, fer-t, fcr-imus, fer-tis, fer-nnt. iENT. Passive. Fer-6r, fer-ris, fer-tur, fer-iinur, fer-iminl, fer-untur. 186 FIRST liATIN BOOK. PARADIGM — continued. [414 IMPEBFECT. Active. I Paanve. Fer-fibam, bas, &c. | Fcr-ebar, bans, &c. Fur-ain, cs, &.c. Tul-T, isti, &c. FUTURE. I Fer-ar, crls, &.c. PERFECT ' Lat-us Slim, cs, dtc PLUPERFECT. Tul-eram, as, &c. j Lat-ua cram, &c. FUTURE PERFECT. Tul-crfi, i&c. I Lat-fis cr6, &c. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Fer-am, as, &c. | Fcr-ar, arts, &c. IMPERFECT Fer-rem, res, &c. | Fcr-rer, reris, &c. PERFECT. Tul-erim, &c. | Lat-us sim, &c. Tul-issem. PLUPERFECT. J ^ Lat-us essem, &c. IMPERATIVE. Fer, or fcrt5, Fer-t6; Fer-te, or fer-tote. Fer-unt5. Fer-re, or fer-tor, Fer-tor ; Fer-imTri, Fer-untor. INFINITIVE. Pres. Fer-re, Perf. Tul-isse, Put. Lat-iirns esse. Fer-rl, Lat-us esse, Lat-um iri. il5, 416.] IRREGULAR VERBS. PARADIGM — continued. 187 PARTICIPLES. Active. Pres. Fer-ens, Fut. Lai-Qrus (a, urn). ra$nv€, Perf. Latrus (a, uni). Fut. Fcr-cndua (a, uni). GERUND. Fcr-endr, do, dum, do. | SUPINE. Lat-um. I Lat-Q. Rem. — The compounds of ferrt are conjugated like the simple verb. 415. The irregular verb, fieri, to become, be made, ia used as (ho passive of faccre, and, in the tenses for completed action, has the regular forma of the passive of that verb. 416. Paradigm. Fieri, to hecome^ he made. Indicative. Fi6, f is, fit, &c. PRESENT. Subjunctive. Fl-ara, fl-as, fl-at, &c. IMPERFECT. Fl-ebam, cbas, &c. 1 Fi-erem, eres, &c. FUTURE, Fl-am, C8, &c. 1 Fact-ua sum, &c. PERFECT. 1 Fact-US Sim, &c. PLUPERFECT. Fact-iia eram, &c. 1 Fact-US cssem, &c. FUTURE PERFEC"". Fact-ua er5, &c. | IMPERATIVE. Sitiff, Fl, or f l-t5, " Fl45. Plur. Fite, or f I-tOt6, Fi.unt5. 188 FIRST LATIN BOOK. PARADIGM — continued. [417, dia INFINITIVE. Pres. Fieri; Per/, Fact-usesse; Fui. Fact-um Irl. PARTICIPLES. Per/. Fact-US (a, iim) ; Fut. F&ciendua (a, um). 417. Vocabulary. Afierre, attul, all at, to bring, to bring to. Auctor, Oris, author. Calamitas, atta, misfortune, ca- lamity. Creber, bra, hrum, frequent, nu- merous. J Fcrre, tul, lat, to carry, bear, en- dure. Fieri, fact, to become, be made. Inferre, intul, illat, to brin^ a. gainst, to wage. Iterum, again. Referre, retul, relat, to bring back, to relate. Romor, oris, report, rumor. Tertius, a, um, third. Utllitas, ati3, profit, advantage. 418. Exercises. (a) 1. Quid fcrs manu, mi fiH? 2. Is labor utilia est qui auctori laudem fert, aliis utilitatem. 3. Tertio die auxilium tulerunt. 4. Crebri ad eum rumores alFe- rebantur. 5. Dixit Gallos sibi bellum intulisse. 6. His responsis ad Caesarem relatis, iterum ad eum Cae- sar legatos mittit. 7. Brutus consul factus est. (6) 1. He Has been made king. 2. Do you wish to become king ? {Fo.) 3. Many reports will be brought to you. 4. What reports have been brought to you? 5. Your father has become poor. 6. Shall you not bring us aid? 7. Do you not wish to cany aid to your brother? 8. Caesar waged many wars. 9. Cae- sar is said to have waged many wars. 10. He haa endured many misfortunes. 11. Do you wish to wage war against your father? {No.) 12. We were unwil ling to wage war against our country. 419.1 IRREGULAR VERBS. 139 LESSON LXXIII. Irreguhr Verbs^ coiitinued. 419. The irregular verb, ire, to go, is regular in llie parts from the first root. PARADIGM. Ire, to go; 2d root, w; 8d, it. PRESENT. Indicative. E6, Is, it ; imus, itls, eunt. Subjunctive. Earn, eas, &c. IMPERFECT. I Irem, Ires, &c. FUTURE. I PERFKCT. I Iv-erim, eris, &c. PLUPERFECT. Iv-eram, eras, &c. | Iv-issem, isses, &c. Ibam, ibas, &c. Ib5, ibis, &c. Iv-I, iv-isti, &c. FUTURE PERFECT. Iv-er5, eris, &c. | IMPERATIVE. Sing. I, or it5, Plur. Ite, or itote, Eunt6. INFINITIVE. Pres. Ire ; Perf. Iv-isse ; Fut. Itorus, esse. PARTICIPLES. Pres. lens (gen. euntis) ; Fut. Ituriis, a, um. GERUND. EundT, do, dum, do. SUPINE. Itum, itfl. 190 FIllST LATIN BOOK. [420-423. Ekm.— llie compounds of lr— et, both — and. Nee — ^nec, neither — nor. Evolare, i.v, at, to Jly away, to Redire, i, it, to return. /ee. Rqs, raris, field, country. 423. Exercises. (a) 1. Fracto pueri brachio, abit. 2. Fundo in tres partes diviso, redit Athenas. 8. Pueri venatum'^ ive- rimt. 4. 'Est{edit) utvivat. 6. Nonne estis utvivatis? 6. Abeat Eomana. 7. Scriptis epistolis, abierunt. 8. Balbus, quum manus in aqnam immersissei, abiit. 9. Cains rus ex urbe evolaverit. 10. Cains nondum rure rediit. 11. Et Caesar et Balbus Eomam redierunt. 12, Venit sacerdos, xit aram floribiis cingcrct. (b) 1. Caesar has not yet returned to Eome. 2. The 424 — 427.] PEKirHBASTic conjugations. 191 boys have gone a hunting.'* 8. Do you wish to go a hunting ? 4. They say he has gone a hunting. 6. He says that he wishes to go a hunting. 6. Do you not cat to live ? 7. He says that he eats to live. 8. Bal- bus, having crowned the boy's head with a garland, went away. 9. Caesar, having conquered his enemies, will return to Eome. 10. They all wish to return to Rome. 11. Do you wish to return home? 12. Balbus IB at his own house. 13. He was with me both at home and on service. 14. You have lived many years in the country. LESSON LXXIV. Periphrastic Conjugations. 424. There are two periphrastic conjugations formed respectively from the future participles in rils and dus^ combined with the various tenses of the verb esse. The first periphrastic conjugation represents the action aa future^ or as one that is about to be done; e. g., Scripturiis sum, / am about to write. 425. The second periphrastic conjugation expresses duty or necessity ; e. g., Yirtus colenda est, virtue must be cultivated. 426. Rule of Syntax. — The agent, or person by whom^ is put in the dative with the part, in dus ; with other words it is generally governed in the ablative by a or ab. 427. Rule oy Syntax. — Many adjectives are fol- lowed by the dative of the object tc hich the quality 192 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [428, 429 is directed, or for which it exists ; c. g., Pax mihl gra- tisslma orilt, peace was very acceptable to me. 428. Vocabulary. Dibere, bib, bibU, to drink. Delen'!, 6v, Ct, to destroy. rgnftrus, 2i, urn, ignorant, IiiiltUia, e, useless, unfit for. M^rimus, a, um, marine^ (fthe sea. Pr6pi6r, us (comp.), nearer, Putaru, av, at, to think, regard. Simplex, Icis, simple. Subvenirc, vCn, vent, to go to the assistance of to aid. 429. Exercises. (a) 1. Tondendae sunt oves, non dcglubendae. 2. Exercenda est virtus. 3. Nonno claudendac sunt urbis portae ? 4. Sapientia ars vivendi putanda est. 5. Puer Itomam mittendus est. 6. Pauperibus qui no grano quidem uno fraudandi sunt, subveniamus. 7. Quid facturi estis ? 8. Simplex cibus pueris utilissimus est. 9. Luna terrae propior est quam sol. 10. Aqua ma- rina inutHis est bibendo. 11. Inutiles sunt libri ignaro legendi. (6) 1. They must be sent to Athens. 2. They must be sent into the country. 8. "We must be taught by the wise. 4. The city must ^be destroyed. 5. The gates must be shut. 6. Must not virtue be learned ? 7. Must not virtue be practised? 8. Every opportu- nity of practising virtue^* must be seized. 9. The poor must not be defrauded of even a single grain. 10. Has he not defrauded the poor ? 11. Let not the poor be defrauded of a single grain. 12. Is not the moon nearer the earth than the sun? ^0—432.1 IMPERSONAL VERBS. LESSON LXXV. 103 II Impersonal Verls. 480. Impersonal verbs arc sucli as arc used only in the third person singular, and never take a personal subject (as I, thou^ he). The subject in English is gene- rally expressed by the pronoun it; e. g., Oportet, it behooves. TaedSt mo, it disgiisis me (I am disgusted with). 431. Besides the verbs which are strictly impersonal, many others are often used impersonally; e. g., Constat, it is known. Juvat, it delights. 432. The impersonal verb licot, it is hwfulj oris allowedj denotes permission^ and may be translated by may and might; e. g.. Licet; may (it is allowed). Licuit, might (it was allowed). Mihl ire licet, / may go. 4i Tibi ire licet, nil irS licSt, Nobis ire licet, Yobis ire licet, niis ire licet, Mihi ire licuit, Tibi ire licuit, You may go. He may go. We may go. You may go. They may go. I might have gone. You might have gone. Rem. 1. — The dative in these examples is the indirect object after ftcW. .•1km 2. — ^The present infinitive must be translated by the English peneci :uii;r iicwif irligni, us lu luu mwvv; uAuuipico. ^kjrc aisv rru-iyj Rem.) 194 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [433— 48tt, (Eruj.)lmtiygo. (Za^. /c/.) It is allowo mctogo. (Eng.) I might have gone. (Lat. Id.) It was allowed me {t/ien) to go. 433. The impersonal verb op or tot, it bcJiooves, dii notes dut?/ or pr jpriety, and may be translated by ovght; e. g., "^ Mo iro oportct, To iro oportct, &c. Mo iro oportuit, To iro oportuit, I ought to go. You ought to go, I ought to have gom. You ought to have gone. Rem. 1.— Observe that here, too, the present infinitive is to be traus- lated by the perfect after a past tense. Rkm 2— The iiifinitive after UportU takes a subject accusative. Latin Idiom. It repents me of my folly. It vexes me of my folly. It shames me of my folly. It pities me of the poor. It irks me of life. 434. English (a) I repent of my folly, I am vexed at my folly, I am ashamed of my folly, I pity the poor, I am weary of life, ib) Me meae stultitiae poenitet, I repent of my folly. Ms meae stultitiae plget, I am vexed at my folly. Me meae stultitiae pudet, I am ashamed of my folly. Miseret me pauperum, I pity the poor. Taedet me vltae, I am weary of life. 435. Rule of Syntax.— The impersonal verbs of feeling, mheret, poenitet, pMet, taedet, and piget, take -.ho accusative of the person, together with the genitive of the object which produces the feehng. (See examples above.) 436. YocAB^ Liitr. Adesse, adfa, to he prfCr:nt, Dillgens, entls, diligent. Amicm,aejriendship. Habitare, av, at, ioinTiabit,dueU Constat, U IS known, is an admit- Immortalta. 2 v«. ,^j ^'^' L'cet, it is lawful, is permitted. i37, 438.] XMl'EKSONAL rERirUEASTlC. 196 Rccipcro (i5), cC'p, cept, to ro- ceive, Saepe, ofleru Sonus, I, sound, noise. Tardus, S, um, slow. •Velox, Oclfl, swift. Mlsgfgt, one pities; tulmc mlsc- rdt, I pity you, Oportet, it behooves, one ought. Pjg5t,o7i« is grieved at ; me piget, / am grieved. Poenitfit, it repents, one repents. Pracst&t, it is heller. 437. Fxei'cises. (a) 1. Constat sonum luce tardiorem esse. 2. Saepo faccre praestat quam loqui. 8. Konne licet Romao habitare ? 4. Nonne licuit AthCnis habitare ? 5. Nun- quam licet peccare. 6. Num licet Cliristianis gloriae servire? 7. Pueros oportet diligentes esse. 8. Ami. citiam immortalem esse oportet. 9. Tui me miseret; mei piget. 10. Sapientia semper eo contenta est quod adest. 11. Nemultaloquere. 12. Miserere nostri. 13. Natura omnes propensi sumus ad discendum. (b) 1. It is well known that light is swifter than sound. 2. Is it not well known that the moon is nearer the earth than the sun? 3. Is it not well known that sound is slower than light ? 4. He repents of his folly. 5. I repented of my folly. 6. Ought not Christians to do good to as many as ^possible? 7. Ought not Balbus to have kept ^ his word? 8. Ought not Caius to have been condemned to death? 9. I have received many letters from you. 10. The bird has flown away fron? my hands. I LESSON LXXVI. Imjpersonal PeripJirasHc. 488. The second ■nerinhrastic conjugation is often used impersonally ; e. g., I I ^m i i ^^^ rUlST LATIN BOOK. [439—442 MM scribendiim est, I must or should write. Tib! scribendum est, you must or should write. nil scribendiim est, he must or sJiould write. Nobis scribendum est, we must ot should tvrite. Vohia scribendum est, you must or should write. Illis scribendum est, they must or should write. 439 Here too the agent is put in the dative (sec 426) when ex. pressed. It is omitted. 1) When it means every body or people in general, thougli it may be translated by we or you ; e g., Edendum est, we or you (every body) must eat. 2) When the persons meant are not likely to be mistaken. 440. In the impersonal peripbrastic construction, if the verb is one which governs a dative (396), its agent (the person by whom) must not be expressed; e. g., Credendum est Caio. We must beHeve Caius {not, Caius must believe). Rem.-!^ m any instance, it is necessary to express the agent, it must either be done by means of the ablative ^vith a or iib, or the form of the expression must bo clianged. The two daUves would leave It doubtful which was flie agent. 441. YOCABULARY. Etiam, euen. Laborare, av, at, to labor, toil. Metuere, u, to fear. Senex, senTs, an old man; pl./^ aged, 442. Exercises. {a) 1. Mihi discendum est. 2. Etiam senibus dis- cendum est. 3. Improbis metuendum est. 4 Tibi evolandum est ex urbe. 5. Manendum est Romae. 6. iotam hiemem manendum est Carthagme. 7 Am- bulandum est per urbem. 8. Laborandum est, iit dis« cas. 9. Nonne laborandum est, ut discamus? 10. 443.] IMPERSONAL PASSIVE VERBS. 197 Num semper ludendmn est ? 11. Nonne resistendum est irae? 12. Num credendum est improbis? 13. Nonne resistendum est animo? 14. Non omnes ad discendum propensi sunt. 15. Discendum est, ut pos- sis docere. 16. Edendum est, ut posslmus vivere. (b) 1. "We must dwell in the country. 2. We must remain at liome. 3. We must fly from the city (into) tlie country. 4. The unlearned must labor, that they may learn. 5. We must fight, that we may preserve our lives. 6. The girls must walk through the city. 7. True greatness of mind must be valued at-a-very- high-price. 8. We should spare the conquered. 9. We should resist anger. 10. Should we not resist anger? 11. We should obey the laws of our country. 12. We must not spare even Balbus. 13. We must pardon both Caius and Balbus. 14. We must not be- lieve even Caesar himself. 15. Having written his letter, he will go a-hunting. ' i,«k LESSON LXXYII. Impersonal Passive Verbs. — Prepositions. 443. Those verbs which take no direct object in the active, can only be used imjperrsonally in the passive ; e. g., Mihi creditiir, lam believed. TibI creditiir, nil creditiir, Nobis creditiir, Vobis creditiir, Illis creditiir. TIwu art believed He is believed. We are believed. You are believed. They are believed. • If ^^^ MUST LATIN BOOK. [444—449. 444. Prepositions, as we have already seen (200) show Ae relation of objects to each other; e. g., In vihS habitat, Jw dwells in the city. 445. Etoe of STNTAX-The following twenty-sis prepositions govern the aocnsative ; viz., Ad, adversus, ante, apud, circa cr circflm, cis or c!tra, contra, erga, extra, infra, inter, intra, jnxta, 5b, pgncs, pgr, pon« post, praetSr, propg, propter, s&undum, sfipra, trans, ultra, versus (rare). 446. EuLE OP SyOTAs.-The following eleven pre- positions govern the ablative; viz., A(Shor abs), ab- sque, coram, cum, de, e or ex, pSlam, prae, pro, sln& tonus. ' Jr 7 , 447. Eule'of SYNTAX—Tlie five prepositions, clam, n, sub subter, and siipdr, take sometimes tbe accusa- tive and sometimes tbe ablative. REM.-/n and sub govern the accusative in answer to whither (i. ^ after verbs of motion), and the ablative in answer to where (L e. aftei verbs of rest). Subter generally takes the accusative. JSuZ tekes ike accusative after verbs of motion and also when it slL fies npon, and the ablative when it signifies on or of (ns of a sub- ject spoken or written about), 448, YOCABULARY. Cis, on this side, Coelum, I, heaven, the heavens. Coram, before, in the presence of. Erga, towards. Firmus, 5, um, firm, sure. Infra, below. Intra, within. Paucus, 5, um, few, little. Pietas, atis, loyalty, faithfulness. Prae, before, in comparison with. Supra, above. Terra, ae, the earth. 449. Exercises. (a) 1. Yobis non creditur. 2. Bonis creditur. 3 Wonae tuae invidetur. 4. Irae resistitur. 6. Pauci venmnt ad senectatum. 6. KuIIa est firma amicitia 450—454.] CONJUNCTIONS. 190 inter nialos. 7. Pietas erga patriam conservanda est. 8. Galli cia Khenum habitant. 9. Intra muros liabi- tiibat. 10. Coram popiilo loquetur. 11. Argentum prae auro contemnitur. 12. Caecus de coloribus judi- care non potest. 13. Supra nos coelum conspicimus ; infra nos terram. (6) 1. The good are always envied. 2. The wicked should never be believed. 3. The conquered must be spared. 4. "We are envied. 5. They will be envied. 6. He was buried within the walls. 7. They wish to be buried on-this-side-of the Ehine. 8. Let us walk through the city. 9. They have returned from the city into the country. 10. Do you wish to go into the city ? 11. My father will remain in the city the whole winter. LESSON LXXVm. Conjunctions. 450. Conjunctions are merely connectives ; as, patSr et f iliiis, the father and son. Certain combinations of these require some attention. 451. M followed by another et; tarn or qiium fol- lowed by tum^ are hotlv — and. 452. Non solum — sed etiam, not only — hut also. {so — as; as — as. as well — as. loth — and. 454. Etiam, even^ also ; etiam atque ctiam, again ami again ; quoque, afeo, too (follows the word it belongs to). 200 FIRST LATIN BOOK. ' [455_401. 465. Aut, or; aut— aut, vel— vel, nther-or, Ara fjj^^^^^' seu--seu, eitJwr-or, whether-^. 466. Nec-nec, nequd-neque, neith^-nor, Vel, or, sometimes even; with superlatives, vei-y • extremdy, ^possible. 457. At, sed, autem, verum, veru, hut Attamen, tamen, veruntamen, 3/^ hut, hut yet. 4&a. Atqui, hut, now (as used in reasoning). 469. Nam, namque, enim, for. Ergo, Igitiir, idco, Ttaque, therefore, then, therefore. (u:cordingly^ and so, there- fore, wherefore. Quarfe, 460. Vocabulary. Amphibiumj,amp;iiSioMsanimaZ.|Nascl, nat, to he lorn Andax, &clBt audacious, darimr. Ntmins 3 .-.« Deterr6re,u,It.^oto. " Ti ^' ""'^ ^^'^^^^^^^^ '^^ Inceptum, T, purpose, undertdkina. Pudor, Oris, shame, sense of shame. Somnus, r, sleep. Impedlre, Iv, It, to impede, hinder'. 461. Mcercises. (fl)l. Et discet puer et docebit. 2. Et Eomae vixi l.r^^"!- i- ^"P"" l""^ °^^°^ t™ ^ai-em mo- mord&at 4. Oyem non solum totondit, .ed etiam deglupsit. 5. Neo timldus est, nee audax. 6. Kimiua somnus neque animo, neque corpSri prodest. 7. Non deterreor ab mcepto, sed pudore impedior. 8. Nihil labora. ; adeo nihil habes. 9. Nemo tarn pauper viyit quam natus est. 10. AmpHbia et in aqua et in terra 9 w-^i ^' f "" ^° ^""^ *° ^"""^ ^""J t° ^^"thage. 2. WiU you also accuse mo? 3. WiU they even con- 462 — 4:66.] SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD WITH UT, NE, QUO. 201 demn the king to death? [No.] 4. We must both leam and teach. 5. Do you not wish both to learn and to teach? 6. We might have condemned not only the father, but also the son. 7. He will either remain at Eome, or go to Athens. 8 Dogs as well as wolves sometimes bite sheep. 9. He sent his son to Eome, but was unwilling to go himself. 10. Caius has been accused of treason, but he will never be condemned. 11. He will not go a hunting, for he has buried his son. LESSON LXXIX. i ill Subjunctive Mood with ut, ne, and quo. 1. in order that, that, so that. )2.the infin. (expressing purpose) 462. Ut with subj.< 3. as, with infinitive. 4. granting that, although. . 5. that, after to fear that not. 463. When iit introduces a purpose, the subjunctive may be rendered by may, might; when it introduces a consequence (as after so, such), it may be rendered by the indicative or infinitive. 464. Ut with the indicative is as, vjhen, since, after, how '"I. lest, that not. 2. not with the infinitive. 3. not with the imperative. 4. after to fear that. 466. Ne with the imperative or subjunctive used impcrativelvj is simply not; as, ne scribas, or ne scrihSf do not write. 465. Ne with subj.^ ^^ FlIiST LATIN BOOK. [467—471 467. After verbs of fearing, at and ne appear to change meanings; iit, that— not ^ ne, tJiat or Jest. 468. After verbs of fearing, the subjunctive present must generally be rendered by the future; as, vereor ui faciam, I fear that I shall not do, vereor ne fddum I fear that I shall do. 469. Quo with the subjunctive is used to express purpose m sentences containing a comparative degree- as, meiMcd aliquU dandum est, quo sit studidswr, some- thing should be given to the physician, that he may bo the more attentive. lE^ For the use of tenses in the subjunctive, see 2G5 and 266. 470. YOOA^ULARY. Cavere, cav, caut, lo take care, be careful. Cognitus, a, um, known. Efficere (16), fgc, feet, to eject, accomplish. Fames, Ts, hunger. Incegnitus, a, um, unknown. Medlciis, I, physician. MSngre, monu, monit, to advise, warn. MuItitudS, inis, multitude. Numerare, av, it, to number. Quo, that, in order that. Satis (substantively), enough. Stella, ae, star. Sustinere, tinu, tent, to sustain, to endure. Vererl, vertt, to fear. 471. Exercises. ^ (a) 1. Multi ahos laudant, ut ab aliis laudcntur 2 Stellarum tanta multitudo est, ut numerari non possint* 3. Medicis aliquid dandum est, quo sint studiosiores. 4 Cave ne incognita pro cognitis habeas. 5. Ne tentes quod effici non possit. 6. Yereor, ne labores tuos augeam. 7. Yereor ne brevi tempore fames in urbe s]t. 8. Timeo ut labores tantos sustincas. 9. Avarus semper veretur, ut satis habcat. 10, Yerebammi ut pax firma csset. 472, 473.] SUBJUNCTIVE WITH CONJUNCnONS. 203 {b) 1. The cold is so great that the snow will not melt. 2. He praised us, in-order-that he might be praised by us. 3. The multitude of men was so great that it could not be numbered. 4. The multitude is so great that it cannot be numbered. 5. He has come to aid you. 6. They have gone to Eome to aid their fether. 7. I sent him home, that he might not be bit- ten by the dog. 8. He warned his sons not to break the laws. 9. We fear we shall increase your labors. 10. They feared that he would not be acquitted. LESSON LXXX. tSvhjunctive with quominiis, quin, and other Conjunctions, 472. After verbs of hindering^ quominiis is more common with the subjunctive than ne. It may gene- rally be translated hjfrcym^ the verb being turned into the participial substantive. Rem. — Quoioinus (qu5 and minus) means literally, by which the leas, or, so that ths less; e. g., Caid nihil obstSt quominiis sit beatus. {Nothing opposes Caius by which he should be the less happy.) Nothing prevents Caius from being happy. 1. hut (as used after negatives). 2. the relative with not. 8. as not with infinitive. 4. that after dovht, deny in nega- tive sentences. 5. from or without with the par- tici'nioJj svJjstoMtive after prevent, escape, &c. 473. Quinwithsubj. i 2^ FIRST LATIN BOOK. [47d -47^; 474. Quin coincides very nearly with hut; it is, however, generally better translated by some of the other forms given above ; e. g., 1) There is nobody, quIn putet] ^"^ ^^""^• ( wlio does not think 2) No one is so mad, quin putet, as not to think, 8) I do not deny, quin turpe sit, that it is disgraceful 4) They never saw him, quin rideret, withoui laughing. REif—Quln with the subjunctive is generaUy used after negative ex- pressions and those which imply doubt 475. The following conjunctions are used with the subjunctive,; viz., ■R?^' ^odo, dummodo, ^rowc?ec?, if only Licet, although, si (0 if), iitinam, would that, Quamvis, however much, however. Quasi, tanquam, as if. Rem.— iVb< B.i\x>r provided, Ac, is expressed by ne. 476. EuLE OF STOTAX.-Verbs signifying to abound, or he d^titute of take the ablative ; e. g., Nem6 aHorum 6pe carere potest, no one can he (do) ivithout the assistance of others. *i7. Vocabulary. Dubitare, av, at, to douht. Interdum, sometimes. Obfltare, stit, stat, to oppose^ f re- vent. Providus, a, um, prudent, cau- tious. Terrere, terru, territ, to terrify. 478. Exercises. (a) 1. Nihil impedit, quominus id facere possmius. 2, Quid obstat, quominus Caius sit beatus? 3. Non 479—482.] INTERROaATIVU SENTENCES. 205 me terrebis, quominus iUud faciam. 4. Sapiens uun- quam dubitabit, quin immortalis sit animus. 6. Nemo est tam bonus ac providus, quin interdum peocet. 6. Osi sapiens yxtutem colat! 7. Utmam hoc verum sit. 8. Sic agis, quasi me ames. (b) 1. Notliing prevents you from being Happy. 2. Nothing prevents him from doing this. 3. Does any thmg prevent you from doing this ? 4. We have never doubted that the soul is immortal. 5. Do you doubt that the soul is immortal ? 6. There is no one who does not think (473, 2) that you were engaged in the battle. 7. He never saw the shepherd without laugh- ing at him (474, 4). 8. Would that all citizens would observe the laws. LESSON LXXXI. Interrogative Sentences. 479. All interrogatives take the indicative when the question is put directly ; as, num credh, do you beHeve ? 480. Niim and ne ar© merely interrogative particles, and are not construed in direct questions. 481. All interrogatives take the subjunctive when the question is put indirectly or dovhtfully, especially when it depends upon another verb. 482. Double questions take two different construc- tions, viz. : 1) a.iic first clause is introduced by num^ ufyiim^ or nSj and the second bv an. 10 -^ 206 FIBST LATIN BOOK. [483, 484. 2) The first clause has no interrogative word, and the second has an or ne. 483. Vocabulary. £numer9Lre, av, at, to enumerate, to count up. [(jfoTs, 18, m., fire, heat. locmobllls, e, immovable, fixed. L5cuples, etis, rich. Maj6r, us, Oris (comp. ofmagnua), larger, greater. Min6r, us, oris (comp. q/" parvus), smaller. Mobills, e, movable. Miser, era, erum, unhappy, miter- able. Mortalis, S, mortal Nescire, Iv, It, to be ignorant, not to know. OXim, formerly. QuaestiA, Onis, question. Rotnndus, &, um, round, Unde, whence. 484. Exercises. (a) 1. Estne animus immortalis ? 2. Yisne miser esse? 3. Quis enumeret artium multitudinem ? 4. Nescio, unde sol ignem habeat. 5. Quid dicam nescio. 6. Olim quaestio erat, num terra rotunda esset. 7, Utrum major est sol, an minor, quam terra? 8. Num sol mobais, an immobilis? 9. Sumusne immortales, an mortales ? (b) 1. Who has come ? 2. I do not know who has come. 8. Do not all men wish to live? 4. -Do you fear that the king will be conquered? 5. Do you not fear that we shall be condemned to death? 6. What did he say? 7. We do not know what he said. 8. Are they rich or poor ? 9. You do not know whether we are rich or poor. 10. Whence does the moon de- rive {habere) her light ? 11. He does not know whence the moon derives her light. 12. Who knows whence the sun derives his light ? 485 — 487.] CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 207 LESSON LXXXII. Conditimal Sentences.— Subjunctive in Relative Chiuscs and with Quum. 485. Every conditional sentence consists of two parts, the condition and the consequence; e. g., SI quid Mbeat, dabit. K he has any thing, he will give it. REM.-r-nere a quU h&be&t is the condition, and dUl^L lie consequence^ 486. Conditional sentences are of three kinds : 1) Those which assume the condition to be true; e. g., Si quid habet, dat. K he has any thing, he gives it. 2) Those which represent the condition as pos- sible; e. g., Si quid habeat, dabit. If he has any thing, he will give it. 3) Those which represent the condition as imj)os- sible; e. g., 1. Si quid haberet, daret. If he had any thing, he would give it. 2. Si quid habuisset, dedisset. If he had had any thing, he would have given it. 487. It must be observed : 1) That the condition is expressed in the first of the above classes by the indicative^ in the second by the s~uujunciive present ot ;perject^ and in the third by the subjunctive imjperfect or pluperfect 208 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [488-490. i i: 2) ITiat Vic consequence is expressed ia tlio first two of these classes by the indicative (or some times by the imperative), and in the third b} the svhjunctive imperfect or pluperfect. 488. The relative clause takes the subjunctive : 1) When it expresses ta, purpose or result; e. g., 1. Legates miserunt, qui dlc^rent. They sent ambassadors to say {Oiat they might say). 2. N^quo cnim tu is es qui ncscias. Nor indeed are you such an one as not to ! know (who may not Icnow). 2) When it defines or explains some indefinite an- tecedent, whether affirmative or negative ; e. g., 1. Sunt qui piitent. There are (some) who think, or some person? think. 2. NemS est, qui baud intelligat. There is no one who does not understand. 489. Quiim (ciim) takes the subjunctive when it in- troduces a cause or reason, or in any way shows the de- pendence of one event upon another ; e. g., Quae ciim ita sint. Since these things {lit. which things) are so. 490. Quum, as an adverb of time {tvhen), takes the iutiicative ; e. g., ItSr faciebam qutl7n Balbum videbam. I was travelling when I saw Balbus. The use of quum with the perfect or pluperfect suljunctive to sup- ply the place of a perfect active participle, has already been noticed (367) 491—493.] TARTICirLES. 209 491. VOCABULAHY'. ConsulerS, Bulu, nult, to conxuli, ask advice. Natid, OniB, nation. PortTmescdrc, timu, to fear greatly. SuadfirS, bu&h, su&8, to advite. SuBtinCrc, tinu, tent, to sustain, withstand. VuInerarS, av, at, to wound. 492. Exercises. (a) 1. Pcccavit, si id fecit. 2. Pcccubit, si id faciat 8 Peccarent, si id facSrent. 4. Peccavisscnt, si id fecissent. 5. Si vis beatus, impcra anlmo. 6. Si mo consulis, suadeo. 7. Patriam auro, si potuisset, vendi- dissct. 8. Sunt qui ridcant. 9. Erant qui saltavissent. 10. Caesar equitiitum, qui sustineret hostium impStum, misit. 11. Nulla est cnim natio quam pertimescamus. {b) 1. If he is alive {lives), he is now at Athens. 2. If he remains at Athens, he will learn much. 3. If ho had gone to Eome, he would have been killed. 4. They would have sold their country, if they could. 5. If the king had been in the city, he would have par- doned you. 6. There were some who were wounded. 7. Since we cannot remain at Home, we will go to Athens. 8. Caesar had sent two legions to attack (make an attack upon) the enemy. LESSON LXXXIII. Participles. 493. Participles assume an assertion which may bo formally stated in a sentence whenever it is necessary or convenient to do so ; thus, puer ndens, may be vari I3f i ^^^ FIRST LATIN book:. [494—498. ously translated, according to the connection; as, ih boy who laughs, the hoy whenhe lauglis, &c. 494. Participles maj sometimes be translated by a relative clause ; e. g., 1. Puor rldens \ ^^^ ^^^ ^^^^ h,ugJis. [ the hoy who was laughing, . 2. Puer risurus, | ^^^ % ^^^^ '^ Qoing to laugh, I ilie hoy who will laugh, 3. Puer amatus, the hoy who is (or was) hved. 4. Puer amandiis, tlie hoy who ought to he loved. 495. If no substantive is expressed, supply man, rmn, he, site, or tlwse, &c. ; e. g., ^ j , 1. Eideutis, of him who lauglis, 2. Eldentium, of those who laugh, 496. With a neuter plural participle, supply things; Praeteritura, \ ^^"'^^^ ^^^^^ will pass aiuay, I what will pass away. ^EM.-Participles, being parts of verbs, of course govern the samo 497. Participles may sometimes be translated by cor- responding verbs with when or ivhile; e. g., Hldens, when (or while) he is (or was) hughing, REM.~In a sentence with when or while, we often omit the auxiliary Terb; e. g., •' Eidens, when laughing. 498. Ifthe participle stands alone, he, they, a man, men or one, &c., must be supplied as the subject of the verb ; e. g., 1. Eidens, when he (or one) is laughing, 2. EldentGs. ^vhen men (or they"^ are hnqhina. 449— 503.J PARTICIPLES. 211 499. Participles may sometimes be translated by cor- responding verbs -with if; e. g., 1. Ridens, if a man (he or one) lauglis. 2. Amatus, if a man (he or (me) is hved. 600. Participles may sometimes be translated by cor- responding verbs with hecause, for, since, or by partici pial substantives with, from or through. ' 1. "because I doubt. 2. for I doubt. 8. since I doubt. 4. from dovhting. _ 5. through doubting. 501. Diibitans, 502. YOCABULARY. Adulator, oria, flatterer, Disjungere, junx, junct, to sepa- rate. Durare, av, at, to last. Expellere, pul, puis, to expel^ banish. Fellcitas, atis, happiness [mmensus, a, um, immense. [nnoxius, a, um, harmless. rntervallum, I, distance, space. Perfidia, ae, perfidy. Perpetuo, for ever, Pervenlre, ven, vent, to arrive at, reach. Pius, a, um, pious. Placere, placu, placit, to please, Revertere, vert, vers, to return, turn hack. Satiare, av, at, to satisfy. Vxden, vis, to seem, Vituperare, av, at, to reprove^ criticise. 503. Exercises, (a) 1. Sapiens bona semper placitura laudat. 2. Pii homines ad felicitatem perpetuo duraturam perve- nient. 8. Adulator aut laudat vituperanda, aut vitu- p^rat laudanda. 4. Leones satiati (497) innoxii sunt. 5. Equum empturus (499) cave ne decipiaris. 6. Roma expulsus Carthagine pueros doccbit. 7. Respondent h 212 njisT LjiTiN BOOK. [504-506. 80 pcrfidiam verltos (501) revertisse. 8. Stellae nobfa parvae videnlur, immenso intervaJlo a nobis disjunctao. (J) 1. He who does wrong (494) is never happy. 2. Those who read this book wiU learn much. 3 There are some who think (488, 2) little of happiness whieh will not last. 4. The wise prize very h§Jy the ha^ pmesswhieh will last for ever. 5. They learned much while remammg at Home (497). 6. If you love your pm-ents (499), you will obey them. 7. We shall parfon b.m If condemned. 8. He fled from the eity, because he had been accused of bribery (501). LESSON LXXXrV. Participles — continued. 604. Participles may sometimes bo translated by verbs with tJiotyh or although; e. g., 1. Eldens, tJimgh lie laugJts. 2. Amatfis, though !te is (was, &c.) loved. 605. We :ften omit the auxiliary verb after though- e. g., ^ f 1. Eldens, tJiough laughing. 2. Amatiis, tJiongh loved. vofhf ^"^fP^^.^ ^^y sometimes be translated by verbs or participial nouns, witb ajkr; e. g., 1. Passiis (Act.), I ^- ^fi^ ^ '^^^ P^«f^) ^^ffered, 2. after suffering. 2. Amatiis, 1. after he was (has been) loved 2. aftei' he had been loved. 3. afkr having been loved.. 507—510.] PARTICIPLES. 218 607. Participles may sometimes be translated by corresponding verbs followed by tbe conjunction and; e.g. 1. Eidens exclamat. He laughs and exclaims {lit. laughing he ex- claims). 2. Eidens exclamavit. He laughed and exclaimed. Rem.— In the above examples the participle is coastrued by the same tense as the accompanying verb ; sometunes, however, a different tense must be used ; e. g., CorreptQm Idpor^m lacdrat. He has seized the hare and is mangling it, 508. Participles witb non may be translated by par- ticipial substantives depending upon the preposition without; e. g., 1. Non ridens, without laughing. 2. Non amatus, ] ^' '^^^^^^^ ^^'^^ ^''^^' ( 2. without loving him. 3. Yituperat libros non intellectos. He censures books {not understood) without un- derstanding them. 509. Participles in the ablative absolute may be Qon- strued like participles in any other construction, the Latin substantive being translated either by the nom- inative or the objective ; e. g., Tarquinio regnant^, whm Tarquin was king. Te sedente, as you were sitting. Capta T^o, after Tyre was taken. 610. Participles may often be translated bv aubstari- tives of kindred meaning; e. g., 214 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [511, 5ia Leges violatae, the violation of the laws (lit. thevio^ lated laws). Vere appropinquante, on tM approach of spring. 611. YOCABULARY Adventus, as, approach. Ante {prep, wilhaccus.), before. Appropinquare, av, at, to ap. proach, Coen5, ae, supper, feast. Cognoscere, nOv, nit, tc ascertain. Comprehendere, hend, hens, to arrest, comprehend. Intelligere, lex, lect, to under- stand. Ponere, p6su, posit, to place. Prof icisci, prefect, to set out, la start. Translre, i, it, to pass over, Ver, veris, n., spring. 612. Exercises. (a) 1. Ad coenam vocatus, nondum venit. 2 Multa transunus ante ociilos posita. 3. Oculus, se non 'videns, alia videt. 4. Cum legionibus profectus celeriter adero. 5. ObmprenensTim hommem Romam ducebant. 6 Non petens regnum accepit. 7. Multi vituperant libroa p^on mtellectos. 8. His responsis datis, iterum ad enm Caesar legatos mittit. 9. Cognito Caesaris adventiL legates ad eum mittunt. {h) 1. He wiU not be condejnned, although lie has been accused of treason. 2. Although invited to tho feast they will not come. 3. They were accused and (507) condemned 4. He will receive the government without seeking it (508). 5. We censure these bovs without knowing them. 6. They were put to death without having been condemned. 7. Having ascer- tomed the approach of our amy, the enemy fled. 8 Birds will return on the approach of spring 513—519.] DERIVATION OF NOUNS. 215 LESSON LXXXV. Derivation of Nouns. 613. Words may be formed in two ways ; viz., 1) By derivationj i. e., by tbe addition of certain endings to tbe roots of otber words; e. g., moeror, sadness, formed by tbe addition of or to moer, tbe root of moerere, to be sad. 2) By composition, i. e., by the union of two or more words, or tbeir roots ; e. g., benevoknsj benevolent, well- wishing, from bene, well, and volenSy wishing. 514. Nouns may be derived from other nouns, and from adjectives and verbs. 615. The endings, lus, Id, Mm, added to the root of nouns, with a connecting vowel (sometimes t or o, but generally u, which sometimes takes c before it), form diminutives ; e. g., hortHliis (hortus), a little garden. 516. The masculine endings, ides (or ides), odes, and iddes, and the feminine as and is, added to the root of names of persons, form patronymics or names of descent ; e. g., Pridmid^s (Priamus), a son or descendant of Priam ; TantSMs (Tantalus), daughter of Tantalus. 517. Atiis, itds, and urd, added to the root of nouns, denote office, rank, ox body of men ; e.g., consdldtus {con- sul), consulship ; civitas (civis), state, body of citizens. 518. lum, added to the root of nouns, denotes the state or condition of the objects expressed by the primi- tive ; sometimes an assemblage of those objects ; e. g., scrvitiiim (servus), either servitude or domestics. 519. The endings, itas, id, itid, Xtudo, and tUs (gen. 216 FIIIST LATIN BOOK. [520—625. tutis), added to tho root of adjectives, form abstract nouns ; e. g., Idmtds (bonus), goodness ; diligentid (di- ligens), diligence ; multitude (multus), multitude ; vir- tiis (vir), virtue, manliness. 620. The endings, a and 6, added to the first root of verbs, and or (fem. rix) to the third, denote the agent or person who; e.g., scnhd (scrib^re), a scribe; htho .(bibere), a drunkard; victor (vincere), a conqueror. 621. ^O and ium, added to the first root, and i6, us, and urd to the third, denote the action or state expressed by the verb ; e. g., pdvdr (pavere), fear ; gaudidm (gau- dere), joy; acti^ (agere, act), an action, &c. 622. Idi!> pd IgiS, added to the first root, denote the abstract of the primitive; e. g., cwpic^d (cupere), desire. 623. Men and mentum, added to the first root, denote the thing done, that hy which it is done, or that which does; e.g., tegrnen (tegere), a covering; Jlumen (fluere), a stream, river. 624. Um, added to the third root, denotes the action of the verb, or the means or result of it; e. g., tectum (tegere), roof, covering; 5m]p^wm (scribere), a writing. 525. YoCiBULARY. Adjuvare, JQv, jQt, to aid, help. AdventOs, 03 (advenire), ap- proach, arrival. Circumdare, ded, dat, to sur- round. Clv)t4s, atis (civis), state. DTligentia, ae (dlligens), dili- gence. Fugare, av at, to put to flight. Hortulus, T (hortus), a little gar- dp.n. linperator, oris (imperare), com- mander. MultltQdo, inis (multus), multi. tude. Nuntiare, av, at, to announce^ rC' port. Pastor, Oris (pascere), sliep herd. Senatus, us (senex), senate. 526—529.] DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 217 526. Exercises. (a) 1. Hortiili riostri multos florcs liabent. 2. Im- pcrator quam maximas copias comparavit. 3. Dili* gentia tua laborem patris adjuvit. 4. Hie nuntius ad- ventum tuum nuntiaverat. 5. Ciceronem magna po- puli multitudo circumdedit. 6. Pastor fugavit lupum qui ovem unam momorderat. {h) 1. Have you seen the slieplierd's dog? 2. "We went to see the boy's little garden. 8. Let them not come into the senate. 4. He has announced the arrival of the king. 5. Did you not announce the arrival of the leaders? 6. Caesar said that he would put to flight the forces of the enemy. 7. The commander has sent messengers to Kome. 8. The leaders will collect as large forces as possible. 9. The laws of the state have been violated by the commander. LESSON LXXXVL Derivation of Adjectives, 527. Adjectives may be derived from nouns ana verbs. 528. The endings, dUs, dris, %cus^ ilis, and iiis, added to the root of nouns = q/^ behnging to, related to; e. g., regalis (rex), regal; popuMns (populus), popular; civi- Is (civis), civil, &c, 529. Aceus, idus, eils, and inus, denote the material; tlie first two sometimes origin, and the last two some- times similarity ; e, g.; joUricius (pater), patrician ; au- reus (aurum), golden, &c. ^^® FIliST LATIN BOOK. [630-.580. 630. Osus and ^m 551 — 554.] COMPOSITION or words. 223 to attack. In adjectives, not; e. g., indlgnui (iii ami dig nus), unwortliy. 7) Ob — against {b assimilated before c,/, and usually/*) ; e. g, oppdnM (ob and pon5r*5), to place against, to oppose. 8) VtOw— for, forth {prod before vowels) ; c. g, prdpCnhe (pro and pongre), to set forth, propose. 9) Sub — under, from below, somewhat {b assimilated before c, f g, and eometimcs m, p, and r; aua m a, few words) ; o. i;, snhjlcere (sub and jac^re), t-o throw under, to subject 551. The inseparable prepositions, amh^ around, ubout ; dis or cZ7, asunder ; re {red before vowels), back, again, away; se, without, apart from; and re, not, often occur as prefixes in compound words; e. g., amhire (amb and ire), to go round ; dispUnSre (dis and ponere), to put asunder, to dLstribute ; redlrS (red and ire), to return ; seducSre (se and ducere), to lead apart ; vesanus (ve and sanus), not sane, insane. 552. Adverbs are sometimes used as prefixes ; e. g., henSvohns (bene and vole us), benevolent; mdlSvohm (male and volens), wishing ill, malevolent. 553. Certain vowel-changes often take place in form- ing compound words ; thus, a, e and ae are often changed into i (a sometimes into e) ; e. g., acciperS (ad and ca- pere), abstmerg (abs and tenere), occiderg (ob and caedere). Rem. 1. — Having examined the prefixes, we pass to notice a few ter- minations of frequent occurrence in compound words. Rem. 2. — Wben the first part of a compound is a noun, the connecting vowel is generally short i, as in Igricm (ager and colore), a husbandman. 564. From /ac^r^, to do, are derived, (l)/e£c, agent; c. g., artifex (ars and facere), an artist; (2)ficiumj cor- responding substantive of thing ; e. g., artifidum, an irt ; {B)ficus, he who does {adjectively) e. g., hcne/icus, beneficent. 224 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [555—561. 555. From cd^ere, to take, are derived, (1) ceps^ agent; e. g., priruxps (primus and capere), one wlio takes tlie Urst (place), a prince, a leader ; (2) cipium, corresponding substantive of thing ; e. g., principium, a beginning. 556. From dicere^ to speak, are derived, (1) dex^ agent, one who speaks : e. g., index^ an inibrmer ; (2) didum^ corresponding substantive of thing ; e. g., indicium, a disclosure; {B) dwus {adj.), speaking; e.g., mdlediciis, slanderous. 557. From cdnere, to sing ; cen, agent ; e. g., tuhicm (tuba and canere), a trumpeter. 658. Fropa velle, to wish ; vokns and vd)u3 {adj.), wish- ing; e. g., henevolens and henevolus (bene and velle), benevolent. 559. From ferre and gerere, to bear; fer and ger, one who bears ; e. g., Lucifer (lux and ferre), Yenus as morning star, the bearer of light ; armiger (arma and gerere), armor-bearer. 560. From col&re, to cultivate ; cold, one who culti- vates, or dwells in ; e. g., ^gncold (ager and colore), a field-tiller, a husbandman. 561. Vocabulary. AddOcere, dux, duct (ad and ducere), to bring to. Attingere, tig, tact (ad and tan- gere), to reachy attain. (Jondere,did, dit (con and dare), to found. Convenlre, ven, vent (con and venire), to assemble, convene. KxptlgnsLre, av, at (ex and pug- nare), to take by storm. Incertus, a, urn (in and certus), uncertain. Incola, ae, m. &/. (in and co- lere), an inhabitant. Invadere, vaa, vas (in and va. dere), to go against, invade. Italia, ae, Italy. Obses, idle, m. Sl/,, hostage. Occidere, cid, cas (ob and ci- dere), to fall, seL 562.] COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 22D Occldere, cid, cIb (ob and cae- dere), to hill Philosophus, I, philosopher. Posstdere, 6d, ess, to possess. Princeps, ipis (primus and capere), the first, a leader^ chief, VcrOm, I, inith. 562. Exercises. (a) 1. Multi pliilosoplii verum non attigenint. 2. Eex portas urbis clausit hostibus invadentibus. 3. Has terras possidemus ; illas expugnabinms. 4. Galli Eo- mam expugnaverunt. 5. Sol post montes illos in mare occidit. 6. Hie unus miles duos ant tres occidit. 7. Incolae ad eum legates miserunt. 8. Caesar omnem senatum ad se convemre, principumque liberos ob- Bides ad se adduci jussit. 9. Incertum est quo tem- pore Dido Cartbagiiiem condiderit. {b) 1. Tbe commander will collect large forces and invade Italy. 2. After having waged war for many years, they took tlie city by storm. 3. Caesar had or- dered all the inhabitants to assemble in his presence. 4. Let us put the invading enemy to flight. 5. Eomu- lus is said to have founded Eome. 6. It is uncertain at what time Carthage was founded. 7. I do not know at what time he returned home. 8. They say that Cuius was killed in the first battle. 5 sigi t M PARADIGMS. Nouns. — Five Declensions. 5tJ3 Endings of the Genitive Singular. Dec. I. Dec. II. Dec. III. Dec. IV Doc V. ae, I, is, Qs el.* Rem.— Some Greek nouns are exceptions. 664. Gender in Latin is, 1) Natural, when determined by sex, as in English ; aa, homh^ a man, masc. ; miilier, a woman, fern. 2) Grammatkalj when not determined by sex ; as, senn^, a discourse, masc; laurus, a laurel, /em. 6G6. Natural Gender. Masculine. Names of males. Feminine. Names of females. Common. Names applicable to both sexes. 666. The grammatical gender of nouns is determined partly by their signification, but principally by their endings. 667. Giummatical Gender, when not determined by nom. ending. Masculine. Most names of rivers, winds, and months. Feminine. Most names of coun- tries, towns, islands, and trees. Neuter. IndecUnable nouns and clauses used as noima. Rem,— Grammatical gender, as determined by the endings of nouns, will be noticed in connection with the several declensions.; 568. First Declension » 1. Characteristic ae. 2. Nominative endings Latin a ; Greek e, as, and es. 3. Grammatical gender : a and e, fem. ; as and es, masc. KBH.—Cases coming under previous rules (565 and 567) are, of course, excepted. * In this ending e is long, except in s pi? I, fid 5 1, and rfit 228 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [569- 4. Caae-endings. Norn. Gen. Dat. Ace. Sing. a, ae, ae, Sm, Plur. ae, Arum, ia, aa, Ran.— The declension of Greek nouns presents some exceptions. Voc a, ae, Abl. a. is. 5. Paradigms. 1. Mas3., a muse. Sing. N. MQs-£, G. Mos-ae, D. MOs-ae, A. MQs-ilm, V. Mos-a, A. MOs-fl, Plur. MQs>ae. MQS'flrBm. MQs-Is. Mils-as. Mos-ae. Mqs-Is. 3. Aeneas (a man's name). N. Aen8-5s. Gt. Aene-ae. D. Aen6«ae. A. AenS-Sm (an). V. Aeng-a. A. Aeng-a. 2. Epitome, an abridgment Sing. Plur. N. EpJt6m-e, Ep!t6m-a©. G. Epit5m-es, EpitSm-arfim D. Epit(5m-ae, EpIttJm-iaL A. Epit(5m-6n, Epit(5m-aa V EpitSm-S, EpItSm-ae. A. Epit(5m-5, Epitom-ia. 4. Anchlsfis (a man^s name), N. Anchis-es. G. Anchis-ae. D. Anchls-ae. A. Anchia^D. V. Anchls-5 (a). A. Anchl3-5 (a). 669. /Second JDeclenswn. 1. Characteristic *. a. Nominative endings: Latin, er, ir, us, urn; Greek, os and on, 8. Grammatical gender: «m and^ow, neut., the rest masculine, except, , 1) Alvus, domtis, humiis, and vannus, which are feminine; pel* giis and virus, neuter; and vulgOs, generally neuter, but eomo- times masculine. 2) Such as como under previous rules. 4. Case-endings. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace Voc Abl. Stng. Nom. end. I, 6, iim, « (or like nom.), a, flur. l{neut.^), orOm, is, 6s(nc«f.a), l{neut K), la. Rbm.—A fen Greek nouns are cxcoptions PARADIGMS. 570.] 5. Paradigms. Servus, slave. I Rggnum, king. I Gener, sorum- I dom. \ lam. Serv-Qfl. Serv-L Serv-6. Senr-fim. Serv-6. Serv-6. Serv-L Serv-Sriim. Serv-ia. Serv-Oa. Serv-L Serv-Is. SINGULAE. RSgn-iim. QHnSr. Rggn-L GSngr-L Regn-o. QSnST-6. Rfign-fim, Ggn6r-fim Regn-fim, G6n6r. RSgn-<5. G6n6r-6. PLURAL. Rggn-a. Ggngr-L R6gn-5rfim. G6ngr-6rum. Regn-is. G6n&-i8. Rggn-a. QSnSr-oa. Rggn-a. QSn^r-L Rggn-ifl. QSnSr-ia. Ran.— Vlr, a man, is declined like ginir. 229 Ager, field. Ag6r, Agr-L Agr-«. Agr-iim. Ag^r. Agr-A Agr-L Agr-OrQia. Agr-is. Agr-6a. Agr-l Agr-I4 6. Paradigms of Greek nouns. 1. Eion, n. (name of a city). K Bi-oa G. ni-L D. ni-o. A. Ili-5n. V. Di-Sn. A. Ili-5. 2. Delos, f. (name of an island) N. Del-oa. G. Del-L D. D61-6. A. DeWn. V. DS1-& A. Del-d. 570. Third Declension. 1. Characteristic is. 2. Nominative endings • a, e, i, o, y, c, Z, «, r, s, t, x. 3. Table of gander in the tWrd declension. Masculine, er, or, os, es increasing in gen. and o, except do, go, and io. Neuter. a.«»i,y,c,l,n,t,u; tir, andva. Teminine. do, go, io, aa, is, ya, aus, B impure, es no< tn- creasing in gen. and x. For exceptions, see 579. 4. Classification of nouns of the third declension, according to Uw formation of root from nominative ending. Class I. Class II. masa TfT Root like Nom. Class n. Root adds a let- ter. 11 Root drops nam, ending. Root changoa nom ending. 230 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [571, 672. 6. MiiscuUno nnd feminine case-endings. Noni. Gen. Dat Ace. Voc. Abl. Sing. ..is, I, Cm, (Km), .. « (iV Plur. Cs, iim(iilm), rbOs, Cs, ca, IbOa. Rim. 1.— The Liclosed endings im and i belong only to a few words. Rem. 2. —The ending iam of the genitire plunL Kcurs in the folloiring claswss ol nouns; viz., 1) Neuters in e, al, and or; as, m&ri, mariim, Animil, anlm&liim. 2) Nouns in i» and ea of Class HI. ; as, hottU, hottiim; n»6<«, nabiiin. 3) All monosyllables in « or x preceded by a consonant ; as, urb», urbiim ; €irx, arciim. 4) Nouns in na and r* (though in tlicse im is sometimes used) ; as, client, clientiim / cohmrt, cohortiim. 6. Neuter case-endings. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace Voc. Abl. Sinff. .. Js, I, .. .. 6(i), Flur. f(iil), iim(iiim), Ibiis, &{i&), a(ia), ibOs. Rbu.— The inclosed endings belong to neuters hi e, a/, and or. 671. Class I. comprises nouns in c,* I, n, r, ty and y. Theso either have the root the same as the nominative singular, or form it (with a few exceptions) by one of the following slight Vowel-changes: 1) Nouns in ter and ber generally drop e in the root : as, pa^er^ a father ; root, patr. 2) Nouns in en generally change e into i in the root; aa, flUmen^ a river ; root, j^Zamtn. 3) Nouns in ut change ii into i in the root; as, caput y a head; root, caplt. RsM.— The quantity of the radical vowel is sometimes changed ; this is the case in most nouns in al and fr, which generally lengthen the vowel in the root. 672. Class II. comprises nouns of the third declension in a, o, ^and a few in i. These form the root by adding a letter to the nominative singular. 1) Nouns in a, and a few in i, add t; as, ^poSma, a poem; root, poBmat : hydromeli, mead ; root, hydromeW. 2) Nouns in o add n ; as, Ze8, a lion ; root, ledn. Rbu. 1.— is long in the root. RiM. 2.— Nouns in do and go change o into I, before n in the root j as, virf^- a vir gin; root, vtr^n. There are only two nuuua uf tliis ending, one of which belongs to Cbiss 11. 673—575.] PARADIGMS— NOUNS. 231 673. Class III. comprises nouns of tho tliird declension in bsl msy j«, X (= cs or gs), is, ys, e, a few in «,♦ and a few in es. They (ormi tiie root by dropping tho nominative ending. 1) Nouns in bs,msyps, and ys, drop s; as, urbs, a city; root, nrb; hiems, winter; root, hvem. 2) Nouns in x (=zcs or gs) drop the sin x; us, vox (cs), u voice; root, vOc; rex (gs), a king; root, rSg. 8) Nouns in is, e, and a few in es, drop those endings; as, hosCis, an enemy; root, /to": nftftgs, a cloud; root, nli6; mare, a sea ; root, mar. 674. Class IV. comprises nouns of the third declension in as, os, us. Is, ns, rs, and most of those in es. These form the root by tjhanging s into r, t, or d. 1) Nouns in as. Is, ns, rs, and most of those in es, generally change s into t; as, pieias, piety; root, pe/a^- wions, a mountain; root, mont: aW«s, a fir-tree ; root, aJic^- miles, a soldier; root, miZi/. (See Rem. 2, below.) Rem. l.-Maaculinea in aa, of Greek origin, insert n before / in the root ; us, iltpha*, an elephant ; root, ilipkant. Rim. 2.— Many nouns in e» change e into i, before /, in tlie root ; aa. mllit : root mUU. 'til 2) Nouns in os and us generally change s into ror t; aB,Jlds, a flower; T0f^i,jl6r: sacerdds, a priest; root, sacerddt: virtus, virtue; root, virmt: genus, a kind; root, gener: tempus, ime; loot, iempiir. Rbm.— Most nouns in ua change « into /•, and u of tho nominatiro becomes lotiln the root, as in these examples. 675. Paradigms. Miilier, /, a woman. (root, tame as nom. £126].) Singular. rftral. N". MaiiSr, Muligr-es. &. Miiligr-18, Muligr-iim. D, Muligr-I, Miiligr-ibus, A. MaiiSr-Sm, MuliSr-ga. V. MuUgr, Muligr-6s. A. MQligr^, MtmSr-ibtis. VirgS,/, a virgim (root, virgin [131, 2. Rim. 2] ) Singular. N. VirgS, G. Virgln-is, D. Virgin-i, A- Virg&i-Sm, V. VirgS, A. Virgin-5, PluraU VirgjQ-SB. Virgin-tim. VirgLn-ibOfl. VirgIn-58. Virgin-ga. Virgin-n)fia ♦ Noims in t are of Greek origin: most of these are iudeclinnblo; a few form the root by dropping i, and a few by adding t (572, 1). 1. 282 FIRST LATIN BOOK. L57U Rex (gs), m., a king. Corpus, n ., a body. (root, rig [134, 2].) (root, corp^ [137,2].) Singular. Plural Singular. Plural. N, Rex, RCg-5s. N. Corpus, Corpor-fl. G. Keg-Js, Reg-fim. G. CorpSr-is, Corp6r-fini. D. Rsg-I, Reg-Ms. D. Corp5r-i, CorpSr-ibOsL A- Reg-Cni, Reg-ea. A. Corpiis, Corp6r-a. V. Bex, R6g-6fl. V. Corpus, CorpSr-^ A. R6g-«, Rgg-ibus. A. Corp6r-S, Corpor-ibQa GREEK NOUNS. Pericles (a man's name). HerOs, a hero. 1 Singular. Plural. N. Pgrid-ea. 1 N. HerO-s, Her6-6a G. Pgricl -&. G. HerO-is, H?.r5-um. D. PMd -L D. H6r6-I, Hero-ibus. A. PSricWm (eu). A. H6r6-em (2), HsrO-Ss (ju; V. Pgrid-Ss (6). V. H6r6-s, H6ro-6s. A. Perid-6. A. Hero-e, Hcro-ibua 676. Fourth Declension. 1. Characteristic Us. 2. Nominative endings : us and u. 3. Grammatical Gender : w, neuter; «s, masculine ; e»^ept AeUa, a needle ; dSmiis, a house ; m&niis, a hand ; Idus, the idb3 portlcus, a gallery ; trIbiiB, a tribe; which are feminine. 4. Masculine and feminine case-endings. Nom. Gen. Dat Accus. Voc. Abl. Siriff. us, us, ui. Gm, us, 0. Flur Qs, ufim, ibus (ubiis*), Qs, Ds, rbu8(ubas*). 5. Neuter case-endings. Nom: Gen. Dat. Accus. Voc. Abl. Sinff. Q, as, Q, % Q, fl. Flur. ua, uum, ibu8(ubus*), nS, u2, ibiis (ubfi»»> * This sncliug is used only in a few words. L57U 577, 678.] PARADIGMS — NOUNS. 233 6. Paradigms. Fructus, m., fruit. (root, fruet.) Singular. Plural. NT. Fruct-us, Fruct-Qs. G. Fruct-Qs, Fruct-uiim. D. Fruct-ui, Fruct-ibua A. Fruct-um, Fruct-Os. V. Fruct-fis, Fruct-Qa, A, Fruct-u, Fruct-ibus. Coma, 7j., a horn. (root, com.') Singular. K Com-Q, G. Com-Qs, D. Oom-Q, A. Com-Q, V. Com-Q, A. Cora-Q, Plural. Com-ui Corn-uCim. Com-Ibufl. Com-uS. Cora-uS. Com-n)iia 577. FifiJi Declension. 1. Characteristic ei.* 2. Nominative ending : es. ^ 3. Grammatical gender feminine, except diss, a day (m. and/ in singular, and m. in plural), and merldies, mid-day (masc). 4. Case-endinofs. Dat. CI,* Sbtis, Gen. 6rum, Norn. Sinff. 69, Plur. 6s, Paradigms. Res, /, a thing. (root, r.) Accua. €m, 6s, Voc. 63, 6s, Abl. 6. 6btis. Singular. N. R-6s, R-^I, R-gi, R-gm, R-68, R-e, G. D. A. y. A. Plural. R-6S. R-6riim. R-ebua. R-ea R-es. R-ebus. Dies, m. and/, a day. (root, di.) K G. D. A. V. A. Singular. Di-6s, Di-Si, Di-ei, Di-Sm, Di-6s, Di-6, Plural. Di-6s. Di-erum. Di-6bu8. Di-6a Di-6s. Di-ebua 578. Case-endings of Substantives. N. G. D, A. V. A. Dec. I. F. ae. ae. ftm. a. Dec. II. M. N. us, er,ir, tun. i. 6. fim. S, er, ir, o. urn. SINGULAR. Dec. III. M.a^F. N. various. 13. L Sm (im), like nom. like nom. 6(1). Dec IV. M, tis. Qa uL iim. Qa Q. N. Q. Q. Q. Q. Doc P. 6L* a.* 6a 6. » InUis ending of the gen. and dai sing, e is long, except in sjiii (where it is short), Jidei, and ret (where it is common). 234 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [670 N. O. D. A. V. A. Due I. F. ae. Oruni. Is. a& ae Is. M. I. Orujn. Is. Cs. L is. PLURAL. Dec. III. S& & or ilL Qm (ium). Ibils. Cs, Kor in Ss. & or is.. rbus. Dut. H- Dec. III. Dec. IV. Dec. V M. AT. r. Qs. uiL 68. uum. Crtim. rbiis (ubua> ebOfl. Qs. ua. 68. Qs. ua. Tifl. ibiis (iibus). Cbust RBM.-'nio above table presentathe endin^a of all nouns in the Latin languagj, except a few derived from the Greek. 579. Table of Genders. I. Natural Gender. Masculine. Names of males. \ Feminine. Names of females. Common. Names applicable to both sexes. II. Grammatical Gender, independent of nominative ending. Masculine. Most names of rivers, wxds, and months. Feminino. Most names of coun- tries, towns, islands, and trees. Neuter. Indeclinable noims, and clauses used as nouns, III. Grammatical Gender, as determined by nominative cndin<^. Dec I. Dec. II. j Masculine, as, es. er, us, 08.* I Feminine, a, e. I Neuter. um, oa Dec. Ill, Dec IV. I Dec V I or, or, OS, es, in- creasing in gen., o except do, go, and io. a, e, i, 7, c, 1, n, t, ar, ur, us. do, go, io, as, is, ys, aus, s impure, x, es not increasing in gen. I \ vu I OS. I Principal Exceptions.\ SECOND DECLENSION. Alvfis domiis, humus, and vannQs, are feminine ; pSlagOs and virQu, neuter ; vulgtis, generally neuter, sometimes masculine. * Nouns in ir have natural gender. 4- 'I'hlfl liaf rip A-v/t/i-r\4ir.r«a /.i%ri4n?.^n ewr\—^^ «»t.^ — -1 — !_ i , tical They arc given here for convenience of reference. 580.J GENDERS. THIRD DECLENSION. 235 1) Mascuunes. (do and go.) Card«, c5m«d8, barpilgfi, ord«, OnodS, Ug8, and niarg» (the last sometimes /«m.). (at,) As and Greek nouns in as (gen, anfta). (m.) Amnis, anguls, axis, cassis, cinis (or /), collis, crinis, enslu, fiiscis, finis (or /.), foUis, lilnis, ign&, Mpls, mensis, orbis, pSnisi piscls, postis, pulvis, sanguis, torris, ungiis, vectis, and vermis. (« impure) Adeps, dens, fons, forceps (or/), mons, pons, qua. i/ac\ and rtidens. (x.) Caiix, codex, cortex, grex, pollex, thorax, and vertex. (/.) sal and soL (n.) LiSn, pectin, rOn, and many words of Greek origin. (ur.) Furfur, turtOr, and vultur. (?«#.) LSptis and mOs. 1) Feminines. {or and o».) ArbSr, cos, and dus. (, ilia. illo. 3. Iste nils, , that. ilUa, illTs. lato, that, is declined like ille. It usually refers to objects -wbich ara present to the person addressed, and sometimes expresses contempt \ 4. \Les3 Is, he or thai. specific than ille.) Singular. Plural. M. r. N. M. P. N. N. Is, eii, Jd. li, cae, eii. G. Ejus, ejus, ejus Eoriim, eai'um, eorum. D. EI, cl, eL lis or els, ils or els, ii3 or eL A. Eiira, etim, id. Eos, eas, eil V. A. Eo, ea, eO. lis or eis. ii3 or els. iTa nr eii 5. Idem, the same,, (Formed by annexing dmn to Singular. M. r. N. S. Idem, eadgm, idem. G. Ejusdem, ejusdSm, ejusdem D. Eidem, eldem, eldem. A. EundSm, eaadem, idSm. V, eodgm. A. EodSm, eadSm, M. lidSm, Eorundem, EisdSm, or lisdem, EosdSm, Eisdem, or lisdem. ?5.) Plural. r. eaedtJm, earundfim, eisdgm, or iisdgm, eSsdSm, eisdSm, or iisdgm. N. ead^m. corundum, eisdgm, or iisdem. eildSm. eisdem, or iisdem. in. The Intensive Pronoun, ipse, himself, is so called because it isTised to fender an object emphatic. It is di'cllnod as followa: [686. 'UlU. zii an )t. 11. old. oia. a. M, or em. Q. ai, Of vs: 586.] M. N. Ipse, G. Ipsiiis, D Ipsi, A. Ipsiiin, V, A. Ipso, PARADIGMS — VERBS. Singular. r. ipsil, ipsius, ipsi, ipsam, ipsa, N. ipsiim. ipslua. ipsi. ipsiim. ipso. M. Ipsi, Ipsorum, Ipsis, Ipsos, Ipsis, Pluial. F. ipsae, ipsaruin, ipsis, ipsSs, ipsis, 241 N. ips^ ipsoruni. ipsis. ipbil. ipdis. IV. The Relative Pronoun, qui, who, ia so called becau::c it iiways relates to some noun or proncun, expressed or understood, called its antecedent. It is declined as follows : M. N Qui, G. Cujus, D. Cul, A. Qui5m V. A. Quo, Singular. r. quae, cnjiis, cul, quSm, qua, N. quod. cujus. cul. quod. quo M. Qui, Quorum, Quibiia, Quos, Plural. F. quae, quariim, quibus, quas. AT. quae, quorum, quibiis. quae. Quibus, quibus, quibua. V. The Interrogative Pronouno. quis and qui, are so called be- cause they are used in asking questions. Qui (which? what?) is used adjectively, and is declined like the relative. Qms (who? which? what?) is generally used substantively, and is declmed like the relative, except in the forms quis, nom. masc, and quid, nom. and ace. neut. VI. Indefinite Pronouns are so called because they do not de- finitely specify the objects to which they refer; e. g., quldam, a certain one ; aMqvj,s, some one ; quisque, every one ; slquis, if any, &c. They are compounds either of quis or qui, and are declined in nearly the same manner as the simple pronouns. BSM.— The compounds of ywls generally take quid in the neut. sing, when ueeo iiubatantively, and gudd when used adjectively. Some of those compounda, ai> itiquls, siquls, take qud (not quae) in the /em. sing, and neut. plur. 586. Paradigm of the verb Esse. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present (am). Singular. SQm, / a7n. 'E.'S *^ou art. Est, he is. Plural Sumtis, we are. Estls, you are. Sunt, they are. 242 Bingular. ErSin, Itoat. Erfis, thmt wast ErSt, A« tra«i Erg, /«Ao// 6e. Eria, /A(m toilt be. Erit, Ac mW be. FIRST LATIN BOOK. Imperfect (was). PJural. Er&miis, we uwm Eratis, you were. I Erantj they were. Future (shall or will be). Erimufl, we shall be. Eritis, you will be. Eruni, they mil be. [580. Ful, / have been, Fuisti, thou hast been. Fuit, A« has been. Perfect (have been or was). Fuimus, we have been. Fuiatis, you have been, FuSnmfc, FuSre, FuurSm, 1 had been. Fuuras, thxm hadst been FuerSt, he Jiod been. Pluperfect (had been). > they have been. Fu&amQs, we had been. FuSratiCs, you had been. FuSrant, they had been. Future Perfect (shall or will have been) t-17 1. I ' Fuer8, 1 shall have been. FuSria, thou wilt have been. Fuerit, he will have been. Sim, I may be. Sis, thou mayest be. Sit, he may be. Fugrfmus, we shall have bev>% Fugritas, you will have been. Fugrint, they will have been. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present (may or can be). Simiis, we may be. Sitis, you may be. Sint, they may be. Imperfect (might, could, would, or should he). Essgm, 1 might be. Esses, thou miffhtest be. EssCt, he might be. Fugrim, I may have been. FuSris, thou mayest have been. FuSrit, he may have been. Perfect (may have been). EssSmuB, ttw might be. Essetis, you might be. Essent, they might be. Fugrimus, we may have 6cm. Pugritifl, you may have been. Fugrint, they may have been. Pluperfect (might, could, would, or should have been). FuiflsSm, I might have been. FiiissSs, thou mightest have been. h "*? f't GERUND. F^r-endl, do, dum, do. | SUPINE. ^^^^ I Lat-u. RBM.-The compounds of fern are conjugated like the simple verb. 597. Paradigm of Fieri, to become, be made. TKESENT. SiibJutuHive. Fl-am, fi-as, f i-at, «&a IMPERFECT. I Fi-CrcnQ, (Jrga, 598. Paradigm of Ire, to go. 2d root, Iv ; 3d, %i. PRESENT. Indicative. i Subjunctive £5» Is, it ; imtls, itis, eunt. | Earn, eas, <&c. IMPERFECT. Ibam, ibas, Ac. | IrSm, irCs, 4.^.^ 600, 601.] PARADIGMS. 257 600. Periphrastic Conjugations. TJiere are two periphrastic conjugations formed respectively from tho future participles in rus and Jiis, combined with thovarioua tenses of the verb esse. Tho first periphrastic conjugation repro- sents tlie action hb future, or as one that is about to be done • e gl m-ipturus sum, I am about to write ; the second expresses duty o3 necessity; e.g., virtus colenda est, virtue must be aultivated. 601. Impersonal Verbs. 1. Impersonal verbs are such as are used only in the third person singular, and never take a personal subject (as /, thou, he). Tho subject in English i<^ generally expressed by the pronoun it; e.g., Oportet, it behooves. ^ Taedet me, it disgusts me (I am disgusted with). 2. Besides the verbs which are strictly impersonal, many others are often used impersonally ; e. g.. Constat, it is knoivn. Juvat, it delights. 3. The second periphrastic conjugation is often used imi)erson. ally; e.g., Mihi scrlbendum est, 1 must or should write. Tibi scrlbendum est, you must or should write. nil scrlbendum est, he must or should write. ^ Nobis scrlbendum est, we must or should write. Vobis scrlbendum est, you must or should write. nils scrlbendum est, they must or should write. 1. Those verbs which take no direct object in the active, can onlji l>o used impersonally in the pa.isive ; e. g., Mihf cred J tu r, / am lelieved. TibI cretiitur, Thou art believed. Illi creditur, v s believed. Nobis creditur. We are believed. Vobis creditur, You are believed. nils creditur, They are believed. 602 bined, hoy pi 603 e. g., currlt 604 compi 605 606 010 ci SYNTAX. i INTRODUCTION. 602. Parts of Hpeech (as we have seen, 2), either singly or com- bined, form propositions ; e. g., Araas, iliou lovest ; pucr iQdlt, the boy plays. 603. Propositions, either singly or combined, form sentences; e. g., Equus currit (one prop.)^ the liorse runs ; Puer lodit et equua currit (two propositions). 604. Sentences, in their various forms and combinations, of course, comprise the language. 605. Sentences may be divided into two classes, viz. : 1) Simple sentences, or such as contain a single proposition; e. g., Puer iQdlt 2) Compound sentences, or such as contain more than ono proposition ; e. g., Puer lodit et equus currit. 606. la a compound sentence, the propositions which compose it aiu cither, / 1) Independent rf each other, as in the above example, and are called co-ordinate propositions ; or, 2) One of them is used to qualify the other, or some part of it, and ia called a dependent or subordinate proposition, while that on which it depends is called a leading or prin- cipal proposition ; e. g., Servus vfinlt ut portas claud^t, the slave has come to shut the gates. Hero, * sennts vSntt' is a principal proposition, and ut portas clandaC is a de- pendent proposition. 260 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [607—611 CHAPTER I. The Essential Elements of Sentences. — Sultject and Predicate Section I. — Subject. 607. Every sentence, however simple, consists of two diatincl parts, viz. . 1) The Suhject, or that of which it speaks, as, puer, in tlio sentence puer ludit. 2) The Predicate, or that which is said of the subject, aa luditj in the above sentence. G08. Tlio subject of a sentence must be either, 1) A noun; e. g., puer, in the sentence piih- lutBt; or, 2) A' word or clause used as a noun ; e. g., mentirlj in the sentence iurpe est mentlri. cr09. Rule I. The Sulject.— The subject of a finite* verb is put In tlie nominative ; e. g., Equus currit, the horse runs. mo. The subject may cither be simple or compound. 1) The simple suhject consists either of a single nominative, or of two or more nominatives representing the same per- son or thuDg; e. g., (1) Latlnus regnabat, Lutinus was reigning; (2) Latlnus rex regnabat, Latinus the king was reigning. 2) The compound subject consists of two or more simple subjects connected by^ conjunctions, expressed or under- stood; e. g., Caesar et Balbus Romam venerunt, Caesar and Balbus came to Rome. Section II.^Predicate. Gil. The predicate of a sentence must be either, 1) A verb ; e. g., ludit, in the sentence puer ludit; or, 2) The verb esse (or sometunes a passive verb) with an at- tributivef noun or adjective ; e. g., * For the subject of an infinitive see 655. I By an attributive noun is meant one which is used to qualify or de- scribe anotlicr uoao. «12— 616.] SYNTAX. 261 1. Ciccru fuit consul, Cicero was consul. Christianl est neminem violare, U is the duty of a Chriih tian to wrong nobody. Here, fuU consul and Christi- anl est are the predicates. 2. Terra est rotunda, the earth is round. IlQraanum esf; errare, to err is human. Here, est rotunda and hiimanum est are the predicatea. 612. Rule H. Finite Verb.— A finite verb must agree with its subject in number and person; e. g., Puer liidit, the hoy j)lays. Rem.— If the subject is compound, the verb is generally put in the plural. 613. Rule III. Attributive Noun.-^An attributive noun in the predicate, after the verb esse and a few passive verbs, is put, 1) In the same case as the subject, when it denotes the same person or thing; e. g., Ciccr5 fult consul, Cicero was '. consul. 2) In the genitive, when it denotes a different person or thing ; e. g., Christianl est neminem violaro, it is the duty of a Christian to wrong nobody. 614. Rule IV. ^r/;ec^it'es.— Adjectives and participles (whether in the subject or the predicate) agree in gender^ number, and case^ with the nouns vhich they qualify; e.g., Terra est rotunda, th£ earth is round. 616. The predicate, like the subject, may be either simple or compound. 1) The s^imple predicate contains but a single finite verb- e. g., Puer curnt, the boy runs. 2) The compound predicate consists of two or more simple predicates connected by conjunctions, expressed or under- stood; e. g;, Puer currlt et ludit, the boy runs and plays. 616. In principal sentences (including simple sentences) the verb of the predicate may be put in any finite mood. 1) The indicative is used, in positive assertions; c. g., Portas claudit, he is shutting the gates. 2") The si'.bjtinclive is used, 262 FIRST LATIN BOOK [617—628 a) To exprcaa an afFirmation doubtfully cr conditionally e. g., D&ret, lie would give it (i. e., if he hadity perhaps). I) Sometimes to express a wish or command; o. g., Scrlbiit he may writer may he write, or let him write. 3) The imperative is used to express a command ; e. g., Per- tas claudd, shut the gates. 617. Rule V. Vocative. — The name of the person or thing ad* dressed is put in the vocative; e.g., Quid est, Catllrna? why is this, Catiline ? Rbii.— This, of course, forms no part of the subject or proUicalo. CHAPTER II. Subordinate Elements. — Modifiers. Section I. — Use of Modifiers. 618. Both subject and predicate may liave qualifying words and diiuscs connected with them, to limit or modify their meaning; e. g., 1) Latlnus rex rfignavit, Latinus the king reigned. Hero the subject is modified by rex (59). 2) Mllltea fortiter pugnant, the soldiers fight bravely. Here the predicate is modified hy fortiter (77). 619. Any modifier, whether in the subject or the predicate, may be itself modified ; e. g., Latlniis, bonus rex, regnavlt. Hero the modifier, rex, is itself modified by bonus. 620. Nouns, adjectives, verbs, and adverbs, arc often found witli modifiers. Section II. — Modifiers of Nouns. 621. Nouns, including pronouns, may be modified, I. By adjectives and participles. II. By nouns and clauses used with the force of adjectives. 622. I. Nouns may be modified by adjectives and participles ; e. g^ Bonus puer, a good boy. See Rule IV. 623. II. Nouns may be modified by nouns and clauses used \v:t.h Uio force of adjectives. These are, 62'!— G30.] SYNTAX 268 1) Limiting nouns. 2) Relative clauses. G24. Rui.K VI. Limiting Nouns. — A noun limiling the iLcaiiing of another i, mn is put, 1) In the same caKo as thai noun, when it denotes the sauio person or thing; e. g., Latlnus rex., Latiuus the king. 2) In the genitive, when it denotes a different person or thing; e.g., Rig\s filius, the /ci%^' sqn: except, a) When it denotes character or quality ; it is then accom- panied by an adjective, and is put either in the genitive or ablative ; e. g., Puer eximiae pulchritodlnls, or Puer cximia pulchrltodlne, a hoy of remarkable beauty. 625. Rule VII. Relative Clauses. — The relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in gender and number; e.g., Puer qui lodlt, the boy who plays. 626. The predicate of a relative clause is sometimes in the indi- cative and sometimes in the subjunctive. It may be observed, how- ever, that the subjunctive i'' used, 1) To express purpose or result; e. g., Legates miserunt qui dicerent, they eent ambassadors to say (lit., who might say). 2) To define an indefinite antecedent ; o. g.. Sunt qui pOtent, there are (some) who think. Section III.— Modifiers of Adjectives. 627. Adjectives may be modified, I. By adverbs. * II. By words (generally the oblique cases of nouns) used with the force of adverbs. 628. I. Adjectives may be modified by adverbs; e. g., Huud dif- f icilis, not dijicult. 629. Rule VIII. Adverbs. — Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs ; e. g., Ilaud difflcllTs, not dijicult; miles for- liter pugnat, the soldier fghts bravely. Rbh — It will b2 observed that adverbs modify verbs end other adverbs as woll an adjectives. 630. II. Adjectives may bo modified by words (generally the ob- li^^ue cases of nouns) used wila the force of iiuvcrbs. These ara^ IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-S) // <- ^A' :/. ^0 1.0 I.I If 1^ m ^ u& mil 2.0 1.8 1.25 1.4 1.6 ^5 -^ 6" ► V] vl ^;. ^ # ^ :>"* "^ /A *^.^^ .^ 7^ 7 Photographic Sdences Corporation ^> V ,v 4^ o 1>. % V ^/*. <^. " -A. .J c> 'Q - 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 ri; t . ^-p i [631-63a 5i64 FIRST LATIN BOOK. " 1) The genitive. 2) Thedativo. 3) The ablative. 4) The infinitive. 631. Rule IX. Genitive.-^Mauy adjectives signiiymg desire, knowledgfiy skill, participation, recollection, fulness, and the like, toge- ther with theur contraries, take the genitive; e. g., Cupidus laudls, desirous of praise. 632. Rule X. Dative.— Many adjectives are followed by the da- tive of the object to wliich the quality is directed, or for which it exists; e. g., Pax mihi gratisslma erat, peace was very acceptable to me. 633. Rule XI. Ablative. — Adjectives may be modified by an ablative denotmg cause, manner, or means ; e. g., Aeger avaritia, diseased by avarice. 634. Rule XII. Ablative.— The&die(itivca,dignus,indignus, con- lentus,praeditus,fretus, and Zlfter, take the ablative; e. g., VirtQs parvo contenta est, virtue is content with little, 635. Rule XIII. Supine in o as Ablative.— Tha supine in a a» a verbal noun in the ablative ia used after adjectives signifying good or bad, easy or diffkult, agreeabh or disagreeable, &c. ; e. g., Dif- ficile dicto (difficult in saying), difficult to say. 636. Rule XIV. Ablative. — The comparative degree without 7«am is followed by the ablative ; e.g., Clementia divinins, more godlike than clemency. Obb— If gufijw is expressed, the following noun will be in the Bame case as that which precedes; e. g., Eur6p5 mTn5r est qu5m Asia, Europe is smaller than Asia. 637. Rule XV. Injinilive.— The infinitive sometimes depends jpon adjectives; e. g., Dignus aman, worthy to be loved. Rbm— Infinitives dependent upon adjectives are generally used as substantives, nvl as such may be referred to Rule XI. or XII. Section IV.— Modifiers of V^^rbs. 638. Verbs may be modified, I. By objects. II. By .advp.rlsial ?jiO(lifierH. 639—644.] SYNTAX. 265 5 1. Objects. 639. Verbs may be modified by objects. These art', 1) The oblique cases of nouns. 2) Infinitives or clauses used as nouns. 640. Verbs may take one or more oblique cases cf nouns aa objects; e.g., (1) Caius puellam laudat, Caius praises the girl (2) Balbus puero viam monstrat, Balbus shows the way to the boy. 641. Rule XVI. — The accusative is used as the direct olrject oJ an action; e. g., Caius puellam laudat, Caius praises the girl 642. Rule XVII.— The genitive is used, 1) After verbs of pitymg; e. g., Misereminl sociorum, pjty the allies. 2) After verbs of remembering and forgetting; e. g., Memlnl vivorum, / remember the living. 3) After refert and interest; e. g.. Interest omnium, it is the interest of all. Kbm. -Verbs of remembering and forgetting sometimes take tlie accusatiTe ; e. g., MCmlnl CinnSm, / remember Cinrui. CJ43. Rule XVIH.— The dative is used, 1) After esse in expressions denoting possession; e.g., Puero est liber, the boy has a book (lit., there is a book to the boy). 2) After the compounds of esse, except posse, to be able; e. g., Mihi profuit, it profited me. 3) After the compounds of bene, salts, and malt ; e. g., Oflicio suo satisfeclt, he nas discharged his duty (lit., has done enovghfor). 4) After the compounds of the prepositions, ad, ante, c6n, in, inter, 6b, post, prae, sub, and super, together with u f&ff others ; e. g., Veni fit mihl succurras, I have come that you may assist (succor) me. 6) After verbs signifying to command or obejj, please or dis- please, favor or injure, serve or resist, together with to iiv- dulge, spare, pardon, envy, believe, persuade, &c. ; e. g., Legibus paret, he obeys the laws (is obedier t to the laws). 4. Uvle XIX.— The ablative is used, i) After the dt'iionent verbs, nti, frut, fungi, potlrl, rcsd, 2^^ FIllST LATIN BOOK. [646—650. dignarl* and their compounds; e.g., Lacte vescantur they live upon milk. ' 2) After verbs signifying to abound or be destitute of; e. g, N6m8 aliorum ope carere potest, no one can be (do) with- out the assistance of others. 645. Rule XX. Two Accusatives.— Verhnoi asking, demanding leaching, apd concealing, may take two accusatives, one of the per! son and one of the thing; e. g., Caesar frQmentum AeduOs flaglta- u5t, Caesar demanded com of the Aeduu 646. Rule XXI. Accusative and Genitive.-^ Verba of accusing, convKting, acquitting, warning, and the IDce, take the accusative of the person, and the genitive of the crime, charge, &c. ; e. g., Caium proditionis accQsant, they accuse Caius of treachery. RaM.-The geniUve is perhaps best explained by making it depend upon tho abla- Uve criming, understood. See 214, Note. 647. Rule XXn. Accusative and Genitive.—The impersonal verbs of feeling, miseret, poenitet, pudet, iaedet, and ptget, take tho accusative of the person, together with the genitive of the object which produces the feeling; e. g., Taedet me vitae, / am weary of life (lit., it wearies me of life). 648. Rule XXIII. Accusative and Dative.— Any transitive verb may take the accusative of the direct object and the dative of the indirect object; e. g., Balbus puero viam monstrat, Balbus shows tlie way to the boy. 649. Rule XXIV. Accusative and two Datives.— Traxi&itive verbs of giving, sending, imputing (dare, mittere, vertere, &c.), some- times take a direct object in the accusative, together with two in- direct ohiecis in the dative; e.g., Regniim suum Romania dono Uodit, lie gave his kingdom to the Romans as a present (for a freaent). 660. Rule XXV. Accusative and Ablative.— Yerha signifying to separate from, or deprive of take the accusative of the direct objecL together with the ablative of that from which it is separated, &c. • tt. g., Me iQce privant, they deprive me of light. ' ♦ IMgnan- takes a direct cbject in connection witli the ablative- e r U bunoro diguutur, he thinks vou vmrihv nf hnr,^^ ' ■ ■ u -J • • 651— 659.J SYNTAX. 207 661. Rule XXVI. Two Darfres.— Intransitive verba signifying to be, to come, to go, and the like, often lake two datives, one denot- ing tlie object to which, and the other the object for which; e. g., Caesarl aux "lio vfinit, he went to the assistance of Caesar. 662. Rule XXVIL Dative and AftZo/m.— Opus est and Qsus est, as impersonal verbs signifying need, take the dative of the peraon and the ablative of the object needed; e. 5., Duce nobis Spus est, we need a leader (lit, thereis need to us of a iiader). 663. Verbs sometimes take an infinitive or clause as object; e. g., 1. Cuplt pognare, he desires (what?) iojight. 2. Sper5 te esse beatum, I hope (what?) that you are happy. 3. NesciS unde sol ignem hSbeat, I know not (what?) whence the sun derives its fire. 664. Rule XXVIH. InfinUive as Object.-— The infinitive mood, either alone or with other words -connected witli it, may be used as the object of a verb. (See examples above.) Rbm.— The Infinitive as object is used chiefly afier verbs ot perceiving, declaring deai'nw^, and the like. -o ■« 666. Rule XXIX. Subject of Infinitive.— -The subject of the in- finitive is put in the accusative ; e. g., Sp6r6 te esse beatum, / hope you are happy. RBM.«-In this example te, which is the subject of eaai, is put in the accu??tive according to rule. 666. Rule XXX. Dependent Question as Object.— An indirect 01 dependent question may be used as the object of a verb; e. g., NesciS unde sOl Ignem habe&t, I know not whence the sun derives its fire. 667. The verb in dependent questions is put in the subjunctive, as in the above example. 658. Rule XXXI. Olject after Passive Verbs.— Yerha in the passive voice are followed by the same cases as in the active, except the direct object, which becomes the subject of the passive; e.g, (Act.) Ualbum furti accQsant, they accuse Balbus of theft ; (Pass.) Balbus furtI accQsatur, Balbus is accused of theft. 659. Rule XXXII. Agentof Passive Verbs.— After pasBiveycrlM, the agent of the action is expressed by the ablative with a or ab e. g., Puer a Cuio docctur, the boy is tanght by Caius ; except. 268 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [660 667 The second periphrastic conjugation (425), which takes the dative of the agent; e. g., Mihi scrlbendum est, I must write. 660. RuLK XXXin. Impersonal Passive Feris.— Verbs which have no direct object in the active voice, are only used impersonally ia the passive; e. g., Mih! credltur, lam believed (lit., il is believed ' to me). } II. Adverbial Modifiers. 661. Verbs often take adverbial modifiers : these are, 1) Adverbs. 2) Adverbial expressions. 662. Verbs may be modified by adverbs; e. g., Fortiter pQgnat, he fights bravely. See Rule VIII, Rbm.— Adverbial modifiers are the same whether the verb is active or paaaive. 663. Verbs may be modified by adverbial expressions : tliese are, 1) The oblique cases of nouns, with or without prepositions. 2) Infinitives, or dependent propositions. 664. The oblique cases of nouns (with or without irepositions) used as adverbial modifiers, may be referred to the following classes, viz. : 1) Ad.-erbial expressions of manner, means, &c 2) Adverbial expressions of time. 3) Adverbial expressions of place. 4) Miscellaneous adverbial expressions. 665. The oblique cases of nouns (and sometimes of adjectives) may be used as adverbia. modifiers denoting manner, means, &c. 666. Rule XXXIV. Maniier, Means, ^-c.^The manner or cause of an action, and the means or instrument employed, are expressed by the ablative; e. g., Durainum gladio occidit, he hilled his mastei ■ ttith a sword. 667. Rule XXXV. Price.— Price, when expressed by nouns, ia usually put in the ablative, and when expressed b} adjectives, usually in the genitive; c. g., (1) Avarus p^triam auro vendet, tU avaricious man will sell his countnjfor gold ; (2) Avarus pecflnidm nisgnl aestimat, the avaricious man values money highly. 2^9 668 — 676.] SYNTAX. 668. The obUque cases of nouns may be used as adverbial modi- fiers denotingr time. 669. Rule XXXVI. !nme.— Time when is expressed by the ab- lative without a preposition; e. g., Hieme ursus dormlt, the bear sleeps in winter. 670. Rule XXXVH. Length of Time.^Ungth of time is gene- mlly expressed by the accusative ; e. g., Caifis annum ontim mlt Cams lived one year ' 671. The obUque cases of nouns (with or without prepositions) may be used as adverbial modifiers denoting place. 672. Rule XXXVm.-The name of a town where anything is or IS done, if of the first or second declension and singular number' 18 put m the genitive, otherwise in the ablative; e. g., (i) Caiua Cortonae vixit, Caius lived at Cortona; (2) Caius Tibure vixlt Caius lived at Tihur. ' 673. Rule XXXIX.— The name of a place where any thing is, or IS done, when not a town, ia generally put in the ablative with a preposition ; e. g., Ursus in antro dormlt, the hear sleeps in a cave. 674. Rule XL.— After verbs of motion, 1) The place to which the motion ia du-ected, if a town or small island, ia expressed by the accusative without a pre- position, otherwise by the accusative with one; e. g., (l) Romam venlrg, to come to Rome; (2) In Italiam venire, to come into Italy. 2) The place from which the motion proceeds, if a town or small island, is exprecsed by the ablative without a pre- position, otherwise by the ablative with one; e. g., (l) Roma venire, to come from Rome; (2) Ab Italia venire, to come from Italy. 675. Rule XLl.—Domus and rfis, together with the genitives belli, hiiml, and mlUiiae, are used like names of towns; e. g., Caius rore rediit, Caius relumed from the country; Balbiis et domi c5l milidao fuit, Balbus was with me both at home and on service. 676. Rule XLIT. — TVia nnnino in ?/-»> nu „ n<.>U»i ~ :- ii- ^ „, ,,,„j„,y ,^ rciuai iiuuu 111 IIIU cU> cusative, follows verba of motion to express the purpose or objec* I 270 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [677—684 of that motion ; e. g., Mittit legates pacem petltfim, he sends anh hassadors to sue for peace, > < 677. Tlie ablative absolute and the oblique cases of nouns with prepositions are used to express various adverbial relations. 678. Rule XLm. Ablative AbsoltUe. — A noun and a participle standing grammatically independent of the rest of the sentence, aro put in the ablative absolute ; e. g., Caesar victis hostibus, Caesar having conquered his enemies (or, when he had conquered; lit., his memies being conquered). Rem.— The ablative absolute generally expresses either the adverbial relation of time (as in the above example) or that of cause ; sometimes, however, it adito an attendant circumstance. 679. Rule XLTV. Prepositions with Accusalite.—Thc following twenty-six prepositions govern the accusative ; viz., Ad, adversus, ante, Spud, circ4 or circum, cis or citra, contra, erga, extra, infra, inter, intra, juxta, 6b, penes, per, pOne, post, praeter, prope, prop- ter, secundum, stlpra, trans, ultra, versus (rare). 680. Rule XLV. Prepositions with Ablative.— ThQ following eleven p/epositions govern the ablative ; viz., A (ab or abs), absque, coram, cum, de, e or ex, palam, prae, pro, sine, tenus. 681. RuleXLVI. Preposiliomwiih Accusative or Ablative.-— ThQ five prepositions, clam. In, sfib, subter, and sQper, take sometimes Lhe accusative and sometimes the ablative. Rbm. 1.— /» and aub govern the accusative In answer to tohither (i. e. after verba of motion), and the ablative in answer to whert (i. e. after verbs of rest). Subtlt generally takes the accusative. Sipir tttkes the accusative after verbs of mo- tion, and also when it signifies upon, and the ablative when it signifies mat of (as of a subject spoken or written about). IlBH. 2.— Prepositions in composition often govern the same ;ases as when they stand alona. 682. Verbs may be modified by infinitives or by dependent pro- positions. 683. Rule XLVII. Infinitive as Modifier of Fer J.—The infinitive mood may be used after verbs denoting cusloniy ability, and the like; e. g., Non facere possum, lam not able to do, &c. 084. Dependent propositions, as adverbial modifiers, are gono- 685—692.1 SYNTAX. 271 rally introduced by ccnjunctions, and express a great variety of rela- tinns, as time, place, manner, condition, &c. 686. Dependent propositions take the verb, 1) Sometimes in the indicative; e. g., Iter fiiciebam, quum has littSras dabam, / was making a journey when I gave these letters, 2) But more commonly in the subjunctive; e. g., Si quid habeat, dabit, if he has any tiling, he will give it. Section V. — Modifiers of Adverbs. 686. Adverbs are modified by other adverbs; e. g., Satis bene scripsit, he has loritten sufficiently well. 687. Prepositions and conjunctions are connectives, and neither modify nor are modified. 688. Intellections are expressions of emotion or mere marks of address, and have no grammatical influence upon the rest of the sentence. CHAPTER III. Use of Moods, Particitles, Gerunds, and Supines. 689. The indicative is used in positive assertions; e. g., Paer lodit, the boy plays. IlBM.— The Indicative is commonly used m principal propositions, but sometunea in dependent ones. GOO. The subjunctive is used both in principal and dependerl l)roposition8. 691. I. In principal propositions the subjunctive is used, 1) To express a wish or a command; e. g., ScribSt, he may write, may he write, or let him urrite, 2) To express an affirmation doubtfully or conditionally; o. g., Daret, he would give it (i. e. if he had it, perhaps). 092. II. In dpponrlpnt. nrnrinoUiAna I) With ut, ne, quo, quin, quOmmus, to express purpose ox 272 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [693—696. consequence; e. g., Vfinlt Qt Bcrlb&t, he has come to write; Caio nihil obst^t quominua sit bcfltus, nothing preventt Cuius from being happy (by which he should be less happy) aj With quum (dim), when it introduces a cause or reason, or in any way shows the dependence of one event upon another; e. g., Quae cum ita sint, since these things are so 8) With licet, although, quasi, tanquum, ac si, as if, dun\ modo, dummbdo, provided, if only, quam\fl,s, however much, however; e. g., Improbus !t3. vivlt, quasi nesciat, &c., tlia wicked (man) lives, as if he did not know, &c. ; Nfimtt, quamvls sit Idcftples, no one, however wealthy he may be. 4) In conditional sentences, to represent the condition either us simply possible or as impossible; e. g., Si quid h^beat, dablt, if he has any thing, he will give it. Si quid h&b6ret, daret, if he had any thing, he would give it. 6) In indirect or dependent questions ; e. g., NesciS unde sol Ignem hSLbeat, I know not whence the sun derives its fire. 6) In relative clauses, (1) to express purpose or result, and (2) to define an indefinite antecedent; e. g., (1) Legates misgrunt qui dicerent, they sent ambassadors to say; (2) Sunt qui putent, there are (some) who think. 693. Suljunctive Tenses in Dependent Propositions. — The sub- junctive, (1) when dependent upon a present tense (pres., per/, def., or fut.) is put in the present to denote an incomplete action, and in tlie perfect to denote a completed action ; and (2) when de- pendent upon a past tense (imperf, perf. indef., or pluperf), in the imperfect to denote an incomplete action, and in the pluperfect to denote a completed action ; e. g., * .1. NesciS quid dtcat, I know not what lie is saying. 2. NesciS quid dixerlt, I know not what he said. 3. Nesclvlt quid diceret, / knew not what he said. 4. Nesclvlt quid dixisset, I knew not what he had said. 694. The imperative is used to express a command ; e. g., Portaa claude, shut the gates. 695. Tlie infinitive, which expresses the simple meaning of the verb without reference to person or number, is used, 1) As the subject of another verb ; e. g., Diflflclle est jQdTcare, it is difficult to Judge. 696.] SYNTAX. 273 2) As the object of another verb; e. g., Cupi5 sipSrS, Ide. sire to be wise, 3) As the modifier of an adjective or verb; e.g., (1) Dignua fimarl, worthy to beloved; (2) Non facere possum, / am not able to do, &c. 696. Participles, gerunds, and supines are followed by the various cases of nouns like the other parts of verbs. In regard to their own government, it must be observed, 1) That participles, like adjectives, agree with substantives. 2) That gerunds are governed like the same cases of sub- stantives. 8) That supines, as verbal nouii.s, are governed like the same cases of other nouna. DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM. BNOUSn IDIOM. 1 To Uunk noUuiig o£ LATIN IDIOlt To recion at nothing (niAWi dudbra otfacire). To value at a high price Imaqni aetttmare). ^ *^ To value at a little price (parvi ae$(lmare). Nothing of stability (nihil atabili' tatia). Something of time (aliguid tempd- ris). Much of good (multum boni). Mow much of pleasure (qtumtum voluptatia). ^''''r7^ZVS^^^b7lZ?'nl *^'!).°'" ^f»«'y. notnumber), much, hou,much, re to DO ttanalatad by nihil, aiiqutd, multum, quantum, followed by ihegerC I To value highly » 8 To think Uttle off ) To hold cheap. j 4. No stability. Some time. Sfuch good. How much pleasure. are i 8. He did it unwillingly. 6. It is disgraceful to lie. 7. It is thej9ar< — dtUy . ' butiness tnarh • character ^ of a wise man. He unwilling did it To lie is disgraceful. It is o/" a wise man. 8. To condemn a man to death. 9. As many as pouible. he can or could. To condemn a man of the head. As the most (guam pluiimi). rhe greatest possible. ^ ^ [ . ., , • M can or ctmld. \ ^* *"® greatest (g-Mant maaXmus). [That is, as many as the most : at ,,-,., , great as greatest Aal 10. On the top of the mountain. On the mountain highest. In the tnzMtfo/ the water. In the water middle (in summc monte ; in media aqua). * To value very highly (maztmi aestimare), + The substantive will foUow in tho ni'.MLnah'.^P nn'TyithotAndi"™ *^* " "* for tliat Las nothing to do with the Latin verb. "" "° "'^ "^ 276 FIRST LATIN BOOK. ENOLISn IDIOM. 1 1. Is goiDg to bed 1 2. It ia baxd to say. 13. "Wliilst they vero (are, Ac.) playing. 1 4. The intention of writing a letter. 16. "Wo must cultivate virtue. 1 6. Caius must write. 1 7. "We must believe Caius. 18. Tha ways of expressing tlie •^irpose are, He comes to see the games. 19. a)l may go. b) I might ?iave gone, 20. a) I ought to ^. h) I ought to have gone, LATIN IDIOM. Is going to lie down (cubXtutn, suj).) It IS hard in saying (difficHo oat dictu; supine). During playing {inter ludendum). The intention of a letter to-betorit- ten (scribendae epistolae). Virtue is to-be-cultivated {colenda est virtus). It is to-be-written by Caius (Cato scribendum est). It is to-be-believed to Caius {crede'tf dum est Ccio). C(a) Veuit ut ludc ipectet 6) Venit ludoa spectatum (sup.), c) Venit ludos spectatOrus. d) Venit ad ludos spectandos. To which add, (e) Venit causa {for the purpose) ludorum spectandOrum ; and (/) Instead of ut, the relative may be used : He sent ambassadors, qui pacem pethent {to sue for peace). Mihi ire licet {it is permitted to me to go). Mihi ire licuit {it teas permitted to me to go). Me ire oportet Mo iro oportuit CAUTIONS. e. ii Him, her, tliem for he, she, the^, when they ixra to bo traaslatcd b;> the accusative), must be translated into Latin by the proper case of tul, when they and the nominative of the verb stand for the same person. Also, in the same case, his, hers, its, theirs, must be trans- lated by suus. , 6. In a sentence with that dependent on a past tense, the perfect i& to be translated into Latin by the present infinitive, whenever ihe notion expressed by it is not to be described as over before the time of the principal verb. Would, should, after a past tense are future forms: ( Ho says that he will come. ( He said that he would come. d. Thing should be expressed by res (fem.), when the adjective aloi-e would leave it doubtful whether men or things were meant: Thus, of many things, not multdrum, but multarum rentm. 9. Cum is written after, and as one word with the ablatives me, te, Ac mecum, tecum, secum, nobiscum, vobiscum. f. Many EngUsh verbs become transitive by the addition of a preposi- Hon ; for instance, to smile at, «tc. 7. Such in EngUsh ia often used where size is meant, rather than quality. It should then be translated into Latin by tantus, quantus; not talis, qualis. h. That or those, when it stands for a substantive which has been ex- pressed in a preceding ckuse, is not to be translated i. When that introduces a consequence, that not is ut non, not ne. That— not \ ^°' ^ purpose ne. \ for a consequence ...ut non. } After verbM of fearing, the Eng.futtire and the participial substantive are translated mto Latin by the present or imperfect subjunctive, with ut or nS. k. Who, what, which, are often dependent intcrrogalivcs, especially aft** verbs of asking, knowing, doubting, Ac 13 278 FIRST LATIN BOCK. /. Mai, might, sometimes mean can, could, and must bo translated by possHtn. tn. Tho per/, itifiiu must bo translated into Latin by the present infin, after might, could, ought, unless the action ia to be represented as over before the time to which might, could, dec. refer, n. In English, substantives standing before and spoken of other substan- tives, are used adjectivelg, and must be translated into Latin by ad* jectivea. D. What is sometimes used fur how (quam) sometimes f^r how grecU (quantus)^ p. For and as are to be imtranslated, when the noun that follows can b« placed in apposition to another noim in the sentence. q. When one, tuo, &c. mean one, two, &c apiece, or for each, they must be translated by the distributive numerals, tingUli, blni, &c. r. / have to do it, must be translated by the part, in dus. (Eng.) With whom we have to liva (Lat.) With whom it is to-be-lived (quibuscxma vivendum est). 8 It is, followed by what is m form the infin. pass., generally expresses necessity, fitness, or something intended. t. But is to be sometimes means, not necessity, fitness, or intention, bul possibility; as, ' the passage is to be found in the fifth book,' =■ the passage may or can be found in the fifth book. u. A present participle must be translated into Latin by a perfect parti- ciple (or its substitute, quum with perf. or pluperf. subj.) when tho action expressed by it must be over, before that expressed by tlie verb begins. V. The English present part. act. is generally translated by the Latin past partic, when the verb is deponent, a. When the action was not done in, but only near a town, at must be translated by ad or apud. •■ X. One often means some one (aliquis) or a certain one (quidam). y. Will and would mil not and would not, are often principal verbs, to 1« translated by velle and nolle respectively. They are to be so translated when for will, would, we may substitute ts (are, Ac.) willing, was (were, &c.) willing. : When an English word is followed by a preposition, consider wheOici the Latin word to be used is followed by a preposition or by a onso ; and then bj" what preposition or what case. LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. A, fib, abs {prep, with ahl),from, hy. ALird; i, it, to go away, depart. AbaolviJrS, v, ut, to acquit. Ac, and. AccedCrS, cess, cess, to approach. AccipgriS (io), cep, cept, to receive, accept. AccipitSr, tris, hawk. AccQsarS, av, at, to accuse. AcSr, ficris, acr6, sharp, severe. AchillGs, is, Achilles, a Grecian hero. AciGs, Ci, line of battle. Ad {prep, with ace), to. Adduc6r<5 {ad and ductre), dux, duct, to lead to. Adeo, 80, in such a manner. AdcssS {ad and esse), fu, fat, to be present. AJjumentura, i, aid, help. AdjuvarS, juv, jut, to aid, help. Admlratio, onis, admiration. Adm6n5rS, u, it, to admon Ish, warn. Adulatio, finis, jiattery. AdulatSr, 6ris, flatterer. Adventus {advenlre), us, approach. Aedif icarS, av, at, to build Aedif icium, i, building, edifice. Aeneas, ae, Aeneas, a Trojan prince. Aequitas, atis, equity, justice. Aestas, atis, stimmcr. AestlmarS, av, at, to value, prize ; magni aestimarg, to prize highly. Afferrii (ai and /t-rre), attiil, allat, to bring to. Aggr, >l, field. AgtJrg, Cg, act, to drive, lead, do ; gratias gggr(5, t3 tender thanks. AgnSs, I, lumh, Ag!-ic51a ae, husbandman, Aiiquando, so^oie th'ie, Aliquis, qufi, quid, any one, any. some; fiUquid tempSris, some tiim Alius, fi, fid (113. R.), o/Acr. AlpGs, ium, the Alps. Altus, fi, um, fiigh, lofty. Amfirg, av, at, to love. Ambitus, Qs, bribery. AmbularS, av, at, to walk. AmSricaniis, fi, fim, American. Amicitia, &e, friendship. Amicus, i, friend. Amitt6r6, mis, miss, to lose. Amphibium, T, an amphibious ani- mal. AmpliQs {adv.), more, further. Amplus, S, vim, ample, large. An, interrog. part., used in double questions, 482. AncblsGs, ae, Anchises, the father of Aeneas. Anguis, is, m. ox f, snake. Angustiae, ariim, a narrow pass, de- file. Animfil, alis, animal. AnimQs, i, mind, soul. AnnuSrS, nu, nut, to assent, to give assent. AnnQs, I, year. Ants {prep, with ace), before. Antea {adv.), before. Antrum, I, cave. Anulus, 1, ring. ApSrirS, 6ru, ert, to uncover, to open Appropinquarg, fiv, at, to approach Aqufi, ae, water. Aquari, at, to bring water. Aquila, ae, eagle. Arfi, ae, altar. Arare, av, at, to plough. Arhor, 6n8, f, tree. ArgeatOm, I, silver. i lis 28U FlliST LATIN HOOK. Armigur, I, armor-bearer ArripdiS (io), ipu, opt, to snatch, aehe. ' Ars, artid, art. Arx, arcia, citadel, tower. Asciinius, i, Ascanius, soii of Ae- neas. Asiaus, 1, ass. Asporgoro (or adapergere), ers, era, to sprinkle. A.t, but. AtbOnae, aium, Athens, city of Greece. Athonienaia (Athenae), S, Athenian, pL, the Athenians. Atqxii (conj.), but, now (aa used iii reasoning). Att:lm(5n, but, but yet. Attingoro {ad and tangere), tig, tact, to attain, reacK Aui;t6r, oris, author. Aucttunnua, i, autumn. Audax, acis, daring, audacious. AudlrC, iv, it, to hear. Augor^, aux, auct, to increase. Aureus {aurum), &, urn, golden. Auruni, i, gold. Aut, or; ai't — aut, either — or. AutCm, but. Auxflium, I, aid. Avfuicia, ae, avarice. Avarus, a, uin, avaricious. Avia, is, bird. B. Ualbus, 1, Balbus, a man's name. Barbs, ae, beard Beate {bedtus), happily. Beatiis, it, liin, happy. Bellum, i, war. Bene, well. B^uef icium, i. benefit. Benlgnus, a, urn, kind BibtirS, bib, bibit, to drink. Biennium, i, two years, space of lice yeari. Bonus, 3, tim, good Brachiura, i, arm. Brevia, tS. short. Urfitus, I, Brutus, a Roman con- fiul. a CMUrS, cecid, cfia, to fall. Caecus, it, um, blind. Caesstr, itria, Caesar, a distinguuhcd Roman general. Caiua, i, Caius, a man's name. Ciiamitua, atia, misfortnu e,cala 'H h'y Candldus, &, um, tvhite. Cilneri?, cecin, cant, to aing. CJinia, 13, c, dog. Cantar»5 {can&re), av, at, to sing. CapfirS (io), cep, capt, to take, rt ceive. Captiviis, it, Qm, captive. Caput, itis, head; capitis, cf the head, to death. Carp(5r6, carps, carpt, to gather, to pluck, to card. Carthaginiensia {Carthago), 5, Car- thaginian. Carthago, inia, Carthago, an ancient city in northern Africa. Castlgart?, av, at, to chastise. CaatrS, orum, camp. Cateuit, ae, chain. Ciiver^, cav, caut, to take care, to be on one's guard against. Celfiber, bris, brg, celebrated CelerittJr, quickly. Certamen, inis, contest. Certiis, 2, lim, certain. Christianiis, i, Christian. Cibus, i, food. CIct5r6,oni3, Cicero, the great Romau orator. CingerS, nx, net, to surround. Cifcumdar^ {circum and dare), dud. diit, to surround. Cis, on this side. Civilia {clvts), e, civil. Clvis, IS, citizen. Civitas {clvXs), atis, state. Claudt5r3, claus, claua, to shut. Clemens, entis, mild, merciful. dementia, ae, mildness, clemency. CHpeus, i, shield. Coelura, 1, heaven, the heavens. Coenii, ae, supper, feast. Cogitare, av, at, to thinl\ to ihinl about. Oognitus, ii, uin, known. LATIN-ENGLISII VOUABULAKY. 281 Cog!io8ci5ro, nov, nit, to ascertain. UOlere, colu, cult, to till, cultivate, practise. Colloquium, I, conference. Color oris, col\>r. Coluinbil, ae, dove. CommitU^rC, mis, miss, to engai/e ; proelium couuoitture, to engage tattle. Compilrfiro, av, ut, to procure, raise, levy. Compelloic", piil, puis, to compel, drive. Coinpesceru, cscu, to' restrain, re- press. ComplGrS, Cv, et, to fill. ComprC'Lendero, ml, us, to arrest. ConcertruS.riv, At, to contend, quarrel. Concilium, I, council, vicctmg. Condere [con [cum] and ddre), did, dit, to build, found. Conditio, onis, condition, terms. ConfugcrcJ (io), fi'ig, to fiee for re- fuge. Conjux, ligTs, spouse, wife, husband Conservarfi, uv, at, to preserve. Consilium, i, advice, instruction. Conspicere (io), spcx, spect, to see, discover. Constat (impers.), it is known, is an admitted fact. Constituoro, u, ut, to arrange, ap- point. Construorc, strux, struct, to build, construct. Consul, lilis, consul, the Roman chief magistrate. [advice. Consftlere, sulu, suit, to consult, ask Contemner^, ps, pt, to despise. Contentus, a, um, contented, content. Continorg, u, tent, to restrain, confine. Continuiis, a, um, successive. Contra {prep, with ace), against. Conveuird {con [cum] nnd venire), vGn, vent, to come together. ConvertSre, t, a, to turii, convert. Copiae, arum, forces. C6qut5r(5, x, ct, to cook, to bake, to ripen. Cof, cordis, ft., heart. CorSm ( prep.mth abl), before, in pre- sence of; adv., openly, in person. Coronii, ae, crown, garland, Corpiis, (Sris, body. CorilgSrtS, rex, rect, to correct. CorrumpSre, rup, rupt, to mislead, corrupt. Crabrfi, onTs, wasp. CrGber, bril, hrum, frequent. CredSrg, credid, crcilil, to MicvJ, put confidence hi. Croscer^, crOv, crct, io invicaac, it wax (as moon). Culpa, SiQ, fault, blame, cam {prep, with abl), with, Cunctus, a, um, all as a whole. CuperS (15), iv (i), It, to desire, Ciipiditas, atis, desire, passion. Ciipidus, 2, um, desirous of. Curaro {cura), av, at, to take cart of- CurrertJ, ciicurr, curs, to run. Currus, us, chariot. CustOdire {custos), iv, it, to guanl D. DamnSri?, av, at, to condemn. DctrC, ded, d jt, to give. De {prep, with abl.), from, about, concerning. Decern, ten. DCcernSre, crGv, crGt, to decree dc> cide. Decimiis, 3, Qm, tenth. DGcipere (io), cGp, ccpt, to deceive. DoderS, dcdid, dedit, to surrcn der. Defcndert^, d, s, to defend. DGglQber(5, ups, upt, to skill, fiay. DGlGrg, iGv, let, to destroy. Demonstrai-e, av, at, to show, demon strate. Deprehendert?, d, s, to seize, catch. DeterrerS, u, it, to deter, prevent. DGvincerS, vie, vict, to conquer. Dicere, dix, diet, to say. '■-'b, onis. Dido, the foundress of Jarthage. Dies, 61, day. Difficilis, e, dijjlc%dt. Dignus, a, um, worthy. DilaniarS, av at, to tear vipicccn Diligcus, tis, diligent. 282 FIRST LATIN BOOK. DilTgcntia {ditlgent), ae, diligence. Diinitti?r(5, mis, miss, to dismiss. Discurt?, didic, to learn. Disoipulua, i, pupil. Disjungurfi, x, ct, to separate. Divid(?r(5, vis, vis, to aivide. Divliius, a, um, divine. Diviti3cu8, i, Divitiacus, a man's name. Doceri?, u, t, to teach. DolorS, u, it, to grieve. Dolor, oris, paia, grief, sorrow. Dominus, i, master as owner. Domus, us or i, f., house ; domi, at home. DonarS, av, at, to give, present: Donum, i, gift. Dormirg, iv, it, to sleep. Dubitare, av, &t, to doubt. Ducenti, ae, S, two hundred. DucerC, dux, duct, to lead Dum, while. Dummodo, if, hut, provided. Duo, ae, 6, ttoo. Duodgcim, twelve. Durarg, av, at, to last. Dux, ducis, leader, guide, E. Edere, ed, ea (420), to cat. EducerS (e and ducere), dux, duct, to lead forth. Efficgrg (io), ft5c, feet, to effect, ac- complish. Ego, mei, dix, diet, to declare (u» war). Indiguus, a, um, unworthy. Indoctus, a, um, unlearned. i.| 284 FIKST LATIN BOOK. ludulgtrtJ, la, It, to indulr/e. ludustria, no, industry. InferrtJ, intul, Ulilt (4i4), to wage. Intra {prep, with ace), below. Inillg{ mgeiiiura, i. About, d6 (^juith all). Above, efipra {adu. and prep, with ace). Abridgment, epitome, Os. Accept, accinoit5 (i6), cep, cept (550). Accomplish, efficSrS (io), fgc, feet Accuse, accusarfi, av, at. Achilles, Achilles, is. Acquire, obtinGr«5, tinu, tent. Acquit, absolverS, v, ut. Act, v., facgre (ig), fee, fact. Admiration, admiratio, Onis. Admonish, monerS, u, it, admunCrg, tfee. Adorn, ornur^, av, at. Advance, promSvGr^, mov, mot. Advantage, OtflitaB, atle. Advice, consilium, i. Advise, euaderg, s, s ; monfirC, u, it. Aen^.as^ Aeneas, ae. Affair, res, reL After, post (with ace). Again, JtSriim. Again and again, gtiam'atqug gtiam. Aga\nst, in (ace)', contra (ace). Aid, 8., adjumentQm, i ; auxilium, i. Aid, v., subvenirS, v6n, vent, adjii- varS, jQv, jut. All (as a whole), cunctus, 2, um. All {every), omnis, 6. Alps, Alpes, iurn. AiKi, dtiam, quoquS. Altar, arS, ae. Although, lieSt Always, eemp6r. Ambassador, Ifigatus, I. American, AmCricunus, 3, um. Amphibious animal, ainpLibiDm, * Ample, amplus, S, um. Anchises, AnchisCs, ac. Ancient, vStustus, S., via. And, 6t, quS (enclitic), ac. Anger, ira, ae. Animal, finimSl, alis. Announce, nuntiSrg, av, at (640). Answer, b., responsum, L Answer, v., responderS, d, s. Atiy, ullus, a, tim (113, R.). Any one, Sliquis, &, quid. Appearance, fScigs, CL Appeate, placard, av, at. Appoint, constituSrS, u, Qt, Approach, s., adventus, us (521). ApproacJi, v., appropinqrard, av, at accedSrg, cess, cesa Arm, brachiiim, L Armor-bearer, armiggr, i. Army, exercitus, Oa. Arouse, excitarS, av, at. Arrange, constitudri?, u, Qt Arrange, array, instrudriS, ux, uct Arrest, comprfihend^rS, d, s. Arrival, adventus, fls (521). Arrive at, perv6nir6, vGn, vent Arrmo, sSgitta, ae. Art, ars, artia. Asy ut As far as, usquS. As if, quSsi, tanquSm. As possible, quSm ■with superL (309) Ascanins, AscSnius, L Ascertain, cognoscgrS, nov, nit Ask, rogarg, av, at. Ask advice, consul6r6, lu, It Ass, asinus, L Assemble, conv&IrS, vgn, vent (560) AssciU, give assent, annuSre, u, tit. Assumed appearance, simiilatioi onia 292 FIRST LATIN JiOOK. At a high price, magnl ; at a very high price, maxiniL At a low price, parvi At home, di5mL Athenian, AtheniensLs, e. Athens, AthSnac, arum. Attack, imp^tfis, Qs. Attai7i, altingt^rg, tig, tact. Attempt, ten tare, Sv, at Audacious, audax, ticis. Author, auctCr, oris. A utumn, auctumnua, L Avarice, uvaritiS, ae. Avaricious, avai'us, a, lira. Avenge, vindicarC, av, at. Avoid, vitOre, av, at B. Bad, iraprobus, a, lim ; nialus, a, um. Badly, male. Bake, coquore, cox,* coot Balbus, Balbus, i. Bayiiah, expellore, pul, puis. Baw, turpis, & Battle, proelifim, i. Be, esse, fii, fut. Be able, poeso, potu. Be born, nasci, uat Be engaged in, iuteresse, fu, fut Be ignorant of, nescire, iv (i), it Be made, fieri, fact Be on one's guard against, cavere, cav, caut Be prejudicial to, obosso, fu, fut Be present, ad esse, fu, fut. Be quiet, qiiiescere, quiev, quiet Be silent, tacere, u, it Be slave to, servlr(5, iv, it Be untoilling, noll3, nolu Be viiiling, vrlle, volu. Be wise, eaperS, iv or i. Bear, s., ursus, i. Bear, v., ferri?, tul, lat Beard, barba, ae. Beautiful, pulcht^r, chra, clu-iiiK Because, quia. Becmne, fieri, tict Before (adv.), antea. Before (prep), ante, coram, prae, pro, Beg for, mie for. T^jtere, iv (i^ it. Begin to bloom, florescerg (544). Beginning, inceptum, I Behold, spectarfi, av, at Believe, credere, crOdld, ciOdlt Below, infra (with ace.). Betiejit, bgneflcium, L Between, intSr (with ace). Bind, vincird, vinx, vinct Bird, avis, is,/. Bite, mordere, momord, mora. • Blune, 8., culpa, ae. Blaine, v., vituperarg, av, at Blind, caecus, a, ilm. Blood, sanguis, inis, m. Bloom, florer^, u. Body, corpus, oris. Book, liber, Hbri. Booty, praeda. Bosom, sinus, us. Both— and, et— et; quun— tfun. Boy, pudr, L Brave, fortis, g. Bravely, fortiter. Break, frangere, frog, fract ; ruia- pere, rup, rupt ; violare, av, at: break one's word, fidem violare. Bribery, ambitus, us. Bridge, pons, tis, m. Bring, bring to, aflferre, attul, allat Bring water, aquari, at Brother, frater, tris. Brutus, Brutus, i. Build, aedlf icai-6, av, at ; construerS, X, ct ; condere, did, dit Building, aedlf icium, i. Burn, incenderg, d, a. Bury, sepelirg, iv (i), pult But, sed, at, autem. But, flow {in rcasoniiig), atqui. But, but yet, attamen, vGruntamea But that, quin. Buy era ere, em, empt By{v3ith voluntary agent), 8, Sb, abs in other cases indicated by j V'l-, Consul, consul, tilis. Cmmlt, coDsuIenl, lu, It Contend, concertart?, av, at Contented, contentiis, 3, um. Contest, certamen, inia. Convert, converter^, t, s. Cook, coquerg, cox, coot. Correct, conigerg, rex, rect Corrupt, corrurapgrS, rup, rupt. Council, concfliiim, i. Country, rus, rOi-is. Cover, teggrg, tex, tect Cowardly, Tgnavtis, 2, um. Crime, flagitium, L Criminal, reiis, L Criticise, vitupgrarg, av, at Crown, a, corOnS, ae. Crown, crown with a garland, corOni cinggrg, nx, net Cry out, exclamarg, av, at Cultivate, colore, cola, cult Cure, sanarS av, at D. Dance, saltai-g, av, at. Dangerous, periciilosus, a, um. Daring, audax, acla. Daughter, f ilia, ae. Day, diss, 6L Death, mors, tis. Deceive, deciperg (io), cep, cept Deceptive, fallax, acia. Decide, decernurS, crOv, cret Declare, indicdre, dix, diet; declan war, belliim indicerfi. Decree, decemere, crev, cret Defend, defenddrS, d, s. Defile, angustiae, arum. Defraud, fraudare, av, at Delightful, jueundua, a, um. Demand, poscgrg, poposc; postiilart^ av, at Demonstrate^ demonstrare, av, at Depart, ablrg, i, it Deprive, prlvarg, av, at Derive, have, haberd, u, it Desire, a, cupiditas, atia. Desire, v., ciipgre (io), iv or i, It Desirous of, cupidus, a, Qm. Despoil, snoliare, av, at Destroy, uC-lGic, Cv% Gt Destruction, pemiclgs, OL Deter, deterrCre, u, it 294 FIKST LATIN BOOK. Dido, Dido, onta Difficult, difflcnrs, g. Diligence, (li%entia, ac. Diligent, diligens, tis, Direct, order, jubgrg, juss, juss. Discharge, fungi, funct. Discourse, eenno, onia. Discover, coEepicgrg (ig), snex, spcct Disgraceful, turpis, & Distniss, dimittdrd, mis, miss. Disregard, nggliggrg, lex, lect Distance, intervallOm, i. Divide, dividgrS, vis, via. Divine, divinus, &, um. Divitiacus, Divitiilcus, i. Do, fiicgrS (iS), fgc, fact Do good to, prodesag, profu, profut Do virong, peccare, av, at. Dog, cSnls, is. Dovht, dubitarg, Sv, at Dove, cSlumba, a§. Drink, bib^rg, bib, blbtt Drive, Sggrg, eg, act; compeUcrS, pul, puis. During, inter (with ace). Duty, officium, L Dwell, habitarg, av, at R Eagle, aquiia, ae. Earth, terrS, ae. Easy, facilis, g. Eat, fiderg, 6d, 6s. iEc?t/?ce, aedif icium, I. -^cc<,eflFic6rg(i6), fee, feet ^^gf/t;, OCto. Either — or, aut — aut Elegance, glggantia, ae. Elephant, ^Igphas, antis, Enact, sancirg, x, ct End, finis, is, m. and/ Endued toith, praeditiis, S, um. Endure, sustinerd, tinu, tent : ferre. tul, lat Enemy, hostis, is, c. Engage {as battle), committ(5r(5,mis, miss; m^fa^'eiaW/ejproelium com- mitt€r& Enjoy, frul, fmct (fruit). Enlinhffin.. illnflfr^rp 'iw *S* Enough, eatia. Entire, tOtus, S, um (113, Rl Entreat, rogaie, av, 4t Enumerate, &numSrSxS, fiv, at -fi'nwy, invlderg, vid, vis. Epistle, gpiatoia, ae ; lit^rae. flrftin Equity, aequitas, atis. Err, errarg, av, at Estate, fundOs, i. Eternal, sempitcmus, fi, Qra. Even, StiSm. Even to, usqu6 5d. Ever, unqu^m. Every, omnis, e. Evil, malum, L Excellent, praestans, tis. Excessive, nimius, fi, um. Excite, excitarg, av, at Exclaim, exclamard, av, at Exercise, exercerg, u, it Expect, exspectarg, av, at Expel, expell&g, piil, puis. Expense, sumptus, us. Explain, exponerd, posu, posit Eye, ociilus, L P. H Fabulous, fabulosus, S, um. Face, facies, fiL Faith, fides, eL Faithful, fidClis, g. Faithfulness, pigtas, atis. Fall, dtdSre, cecid, cus; occld&a cid, cas. False, fallax, acis (535). Falsehood, mendacitira, i. Farm, fundus, L Father, patgr, pStrls. Fault, culpa, ae. Faustulus, Faustulus, L Favor, s., gratia, ae. Favor, v., favere, fav, faut Fear, a, mJ5tus, us. Fear, v., timgrg, u; metuerfi, u, Qt vgreri. It Fear greatly, pertimescerd, mu. Feast, coena, ae. Feel (as pain, dr.), scntiru, s, s Feeling, sensus, Qa Few, pauci, ae, a, j.-aiviuy, iides, ei. Field, &g^T, agfi. J H ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULAKY. 295 riiui gx^ \ Qt Fifth, quintus, S, iiiu. Fiffht, pQgnarii, av, at. Figure, figuril, ae. Z'VV/, complgre, ev, et. Find, iavenirS, ven, vent ; reperire, rt5p(5r, rCpert Z'Vne, beautiful, pulchSr, chnt, chiuia Finiih, finir^, iv, it (540). /'^r*?, ignis, is, m. Firm, firmus, 2, urn. Firmness, atilbilitas, atls. First, primus, 2, um. Fish, piscis, is, 7». Five, quinqu^. Flatterer, adulator, oris. Flattery, Sdulatio, onis. Flay, dOglubgrS, pa, pt Flee, fugerS (ifi), fug, ftlgit Flee for refuge, confugero (18), fug. Flee from, evolarS, av, at. Flight, fugS, ae. Flock, grex, grggis, m. Flourish, flOrero, u. Flow, fluSrg, X, X. Flower, flos, oris. Fly, volarg, Sv, at. Fly away, evolarg, av, at. Following, postera^ um (?na8c. nom, not used). Folly, stultitiiS, ac. Food, cibus, i. Fhot, pga, p^dis. For (conj.), gnim, nam, namqu^. For (prep.), pro (with abl.). For ever, perpetuO. Forage, pabiilari, at. Force, maniis, ua vis, via (pi. vires). Forces, copiae, ariim. Forget, oblivisci, oblit. Formerly, olim. Fortune, JFortQnS, ae. Found, conderd, did, dit (560). Four, quStuSr. Fourth, quartiia, S, uni. Fox, vulpes, is. Free, llb^r, &, tim. Frequent, crobt^r, bra, brum. Friend, amicus, i. Friendship, fimicitiS, ac. Frighten, terrero, u, it. Frmn, a, ab, ab«, do, ex, and soma- times before 2)ilmi.x%SiV,SA.; prize highly, magni aestimarg. Procure, compararg, av, at Profit, prodessS, profu, prof ut. Promise, promittSrg, mis, miss. Provided, dumm6d5. Province, provincia, ae. Prudence, prQdentia, ae. Prudent, i^rndQm, tia; providus, a, Qm. Pull dovm, evert^rS, t, s. Punish, punirg, iv, it Pupil, discipuliis, L Purchase, 6mgr6, Sm, empt. Put confidence in, crodfiro, credid. credit Put to flight, mgarg, av, at, (540). Quarrel, concertard, ftv, lit Queen, rGgina, ae. Question, quaestifi, OoIbw Quickly, culfirlt^r. a Rage, eaevIrS, iv. It Raise, comparar*?, av, fit Reach, attrngdrg, tig, tact ; ptT/fi nirS, v6n, vent Read, IgggrS, ICg, Icct Real, vcrris, a, fim. Reason, ratig, onis. Receive, accipgriS (iS;, cCp, cert rgcip<5r5 (1^); capSrd fy), cfia capt Reform, eanarS, fiv, at Refuge, perf ugium, i. Regard, putar5, av, at Reign, rCgnarS, av, at Reject, respu^rS, pu. Relate, narrarg, av, at; referrS, tul, Iflt Relying on, frgtus, a, Cm. Remain, mangrd, mans, mans. Remaining, rSliquus, a, iim. Remember, recordari, at Render thanks, gratias agor*;. Repent, one repents, poenit^t (4S5\ Report, s., rOmor, oris. Report, nuntiarS, av, at Repress, compescSrS, cu. Resist, vdsistgrg, etit, stit Response, rcoponsum, L Rest, the rest, rdliquus, a, um. Rest, quiescgrg, qmev, quiet Restrain, continere, u, tent; com pescerg, cu. Return, redirg, i, it ; riJveritM t s (551.) Rhine, Rhgniis, i. Rich, locuples, etia. Ring, aniilus, L Ripen, coqugrg, cox, coct River, flumgn, inis. Road, via, ae. Rob of, epoliare, av, at Rnhnxt. rnhnatna >i \tm Roman, Romanus, a, urn. Rome Roma, ao. 800 FIRST LATIN LOOK. Romulua, ROnirafis, i. Jioof, tectum, I. Jiound, riituudris, &, fim. /iule, rSgSrH, rox, rcct. Humor, rQmor, Oila Hun, curriirtJ, cucurr, cura Kmh^ rui!it5, ru, rut Safe, incolumls, H. Safety, bjUQs, Qtis. Same, idilm, ciidiJm, iduut Satisfy, BatiilrtJ, flv, at. Save, BervariJ, av, fit Say, dic^riJ, dix, diet Scatter, BpargSrS, spars, epara Sceptre, eceptrum, i. Scipio, Sclpifi, ouis. Sea, mitrt?. Is. 'S'tfct)?trf,>8t5cundus, jl, flm. ^^«: ^^i^*irii, vid, vis; conspic(5ru (io), epex, spect Seed, sC'im^n, Ma. Seek, p<5tt'«rroMnrf, circumdirgjded.diit: ciii gure, X, ct Sustain, austinerg, u, tent Swear, jurarg, av, at Swift, velox, ocia. 6'M«>n, nare, av, at Sword, gliidius, i. T. Take, cSpgrS (ig), cep, capt Take care, ctlverg, cav, caut Take care of, curarg, av, at. Take by storm, expugniire, uv, at (550). ^ ' . «- Talent, ingSniura, i. Tarentum, Tarenttim, L Tarquin, Tarquinius, L Teach, d6c5rg, u, doct Tear in pieces, dilitniflro, i\v at. Ten, dScgm. Tffnth, dgcunus, 3, um. Tcrm^, conditio, onis. ~ ■ ■ VCr? -"^'^^i L'l «| iU 7%a7i, quiXm, 2%anA9, gratiae, ardm. 14 Tlianksgiving, BuppUcati«<, Bitlrg, Iv, It This, hie, haec, hoc. y7to«, you, tD, tul. Thousand, millg. 2'hreaten, impendgrS. yVtrcff, tres, tria. T'hrough, pSr. 2nf6ur, Tibur, Qria. Till, colSrg, u, cult ^emg, tempua, Sria. Timid, timidua, 2, um. To, ad, In (t«7/« ace). To death, citpitia. Too much, nimiua, S, um. To]^, the top, aummua, &, fim; agre^ mg with the noun, as, eummua mona, tlie top of tJie mountain. Torture, excruciarS, av, at Touch, tanggrS, tgtig, tact Towards, erga {with ace). Tower, arx, cis ; turris, ia {aec, dio or im, abl. 6 or i). Traitor, proditor, 6ria. Tranquil, tranquillua, 3, tim. Treachery, treason, proditiji, onla. Treaty, foedua, dria. Tree, arbor, oria,/. Trojan, Trojaniis, S, iim. True, v5ru3, 3, iim. Truly, vero. Truth, veriim, L TVy, tentarS, av, at Ihllia, Tullk, ae. Turn, convert, convertgriS, i, a Turn hack, revertere, i, a Twelve, duodScim. Twenty, vigintL 302 FIRST LATIN BOOK. 2\do, dud, duau, du5. 3\oo hundred, d&ccntl, ao, &. ifW years, apace of two years, bien- uium. U. Uncertain, incertiia, 3, um (550). Uncover, tlpi^rlrC, ru, rt. Understand, intelUgCrfi, lex, lect. Uninjured, incSliimls, &. Unknovon, incognitua, 2, um. Unlearned, indoctua, fi, um. Unnecessary, sQpervScuus, H, iim. Unwilling, mvitus, &, Qm. Unworthy, indigniia, ^, ura. Use, v., Qti, Qs. Useful, Qtiils, 5. Useless, inQtllia, S. Utility, QtlHtflfl, atls. V. Valuable, prtjtiSsus, fi, fim. Value, aestimfii-g, av, fit. Very {before a noun or pronoun., sometimes), ipsg, S, iim. Very fond, studiosus, a, um. Very much or great, plurimus, S., um ; very many, plQiimL Victim^ victima, ae. Victoria, Victoria, ae (prop. name). Victory, victoriS, ae. Violate, violarS, fiv, fit; rumpSrS, rQp, rupt Virgin, virgo, inis. Virtv/e, virtQa, utia Voice, vox, vocxa. ^ W. Wage (as war), gererS, gesa, •gcst; inferrg, tul, lat. Walk, ambularS, av, at. Wall, murus, L War, bellum, i. Warn, admonere, u, it. Wash, lavarS, Juv, laut, and \&v&t Wasp, crabro, onis. Wane, perder6, did, dit. Watefi, vigflare, av, at. Water, SquS, ne. Way, vis, ae ; itSr, itingris, n. Wealthy, lucuplea, dtK Weep, flCrS, Ov, St. Weep for, iQgCrfi, lux. Well, b^niJ. W/ien, quum. Whence, imdiJ. W/ierefore, quurO. Whether, utrum; whether'— O'r, in double questions, utrum— in, m other cases, seu — seu ; bIvS — rtv(J. While, diim; while walking, inttJr arabulandum. White, candldua, 3, iim. Who, which, that (rel.), qui, quae, qu6d. Who, which, whatf (interrog.), quia, quae, quid? (subs.); qui, qua«j, quc5d! {adj.). Whole, totua, &, um (113, R.). Wicked, improbiia, a, iim. Wife, conjux, gia. Winter, hiema, la. Wisdom, sapientia, ae. Wise, Bapiena, tia. Wish, vellt?, volu. With, cQm. Within, iutra (loith ace). Without, sine (with abl). Witness, apectai-g, fiv, at (548"). Wolf, lupus, i. Woman, miilier, is. Wonderful, mirabilia, «3. Wool, lanS, ao. Word, verbiim, i. Work, 6pu8, Sria. World, mundua, i ; orbia torr.lrQm Worthy, dignua, S, iim. Would that, titinSm, o si. Wound, s., vulntia, Sria. Woxmd, v., vulnerare, av, at Wretched, miaSr, a, tim. Write, scriber(5, ps, pt. Wrong, v., violaril, av, ft. Y. Year, annua, i. Yesterday, heslcnio di9. Yet, tSmen. You, to, tui. j^ .,/..,, ,..._y, ..!,!,., ,.|,J1.I ^ ,, . J tra, triira. iriR END. It iher — ar, in rum— in, in ; sivS — «lv(5. liking, miit I, qui, quae, lerrog.), quia, ; qui, quaa [3, R.). im. It (548"). »i3 torr.liihn. 3. -V, Jit 1. ;/ ■ ' copp, glauk d co:a publications. Harkuess's Latin Grammar. From Rev. Prof. J. J. Owkn, D.D., New York Free Academy. " I have carefully examined Harkness's Latin Grammar, and am so well pleasaii with Ite plan, urran-ement, and execution, that I shall take the earliest opportunity of lutrodi'cing it as a text-book in the Free Academy." From Mr. Jon.-i D. Philbeiok, Superintendent qf Public Schools, Boston, Mass. "This work is evidently no hasty performance, nor the compilation of a mere book maker, but the well-ripened fruit of mature and accurate scholarship. It le sminontlv [iractical, because it is truly philosophical." Front Mr. G. N. Biqelow, Principal of State Normal School, Framingham, Mate. "Harkness's Latin Grammar is the moat satisfactory text-book I have ever used." From Eev. Daniel Leach, Superintendent Public Schools, Providence, B. I. " I am quite confident that it is superior to any Latin Grammar before the publla It has recently been introduced into the High School, and all are much pleased with it" From Dr. J. B. Chapin, State Commissioner qf PuhUo Instruction in Rhode Island. "The \ital principles of the language are clearly and beautifully exhibited. The work needs no one^s commendation." From Mr. Abnee J. Phipps, Superintendent of Public Schools, Lowell, Mass. "The aim of the author seems to be fully realized in making this '& useful Book, and as such I can cheerfully commend it The clear and admirable maimer In whicli the intricacies of the Subjunctive Mood are unfolded, is one of its marked features. "The evidence of ripe scholarship and of familiarity wit^ the latest works of Ger. man and English philologists Is manifest throughout the booL." From Dr. J. T. Ohamplin, President qf WatervUle CoUege. '•I like both the plan and the execution of the work very much. Its matter and manner are both admirable. I shall be greatly disappointed if it does not at once win the public fiivor." From Prof. A. 8. Paokaed, Bowdoin College, Brunswick, Main*. "Harkness'B Latin Grammar exhibits throughout the results of thorough scholar, ship I shall recommend it in our next catalogue." I^om Prof. J. J. Stanton, Bates College. " We have Introduced Harkness's Grammar into this Institution, logical and concise than any of its rivals." It is much mora From Mr. Wm. J. Rolpb, Principal Cambridge High School. "Notwithstanding all the inconveniences that must attend a change of Latin Gram- mars in a large school like mine, I shall endeavor to secure the adoption of Harkness'a Grammar in place of our present tei.t-book as soon as possible." I^'om Mr. L. R. 'Williston, Principal Ladies' Seminary, Cambridge, Mast. •*! think this work a decided advance upon the Grammar now in use." From Mr. D. B. Hagbe, Prino. Eliot Bigh School, Jamaica Plain, Mass. "ITils Is, In my opinion, byfa/r the beat LaUn Grammar ever pubUthed. It Is admirably adapted to the use of learners, being remarkably concise, dear, oompre- hcnsive, and philosophical. It will hen-seforth be used as a text-book in this scbooL" COPP, CLARK & CO:S PUBLICATIONS. Harkness's Latin Grammar. FrfcA, «. scLool-books tbut I have ever seen. I hare introduced the book into the Free AomiT «0'. and an. much pl^d with the results of a month's experlendt tJe cts:.^'- ts. in ruZ'/^rr'^^ Harkness's new work to both teachers aid scholar,. It «». in my judgment, the best Latin Grammar ever offered to our schools." uTh« u ^'■"r ^''■:/- ^' ^'^°^' ^P^-^^^^^ ^'ft^A ^cAoo^, Warren, R. 1. exoriience. Its merits must secure its adoption wherever it becomes known." tra^a Messr.^ S. TimRBEH and T. B. Stookweli, PuhUc High SchooL Pr• <^W to ^>om Mr. H, OEO0TT, Olenwood Ladiee< Seminary, W. Brattleboro\ Ft this \Znl:;T ""'""''' """" ^"'"""' '"'^ ''»^« '^'"^^ intpodu'ced It Into « I